Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 130

Monthly IQ

A Comprehensive Current Affairs Magazine for


UPSC CSE Exam

May 2023
Contents
1. POLITY�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4
Criminalization of Politics���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4
Delhi Govt vs Centre������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6
Caste Census��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 9
Freedom of Press in India��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Internet India Report�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������13
Jurisdiction Conflict in Delhi���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������15
Legalizing Cannabis Cultivation����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������17
Model Prisons Act, 2023���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 19
New Parliament Building����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������21
Promulgation and Re-Promulgation of Ordinances�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������24
Religious Conversion in India��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������26
Law Commission Recommendation on Sedition���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 29
Sub-categorisation of Other Backward Classes����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 33
Supreme Court Verdict on Jallikattu�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 35
Surrogacy in India����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 38
Uniform Civil Code�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 40

2. INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 43
India and Pacific Island Nations����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������43
India- ASEAN Relations������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������45
India-Bangladesh Relations����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 48
India-Maldives Relations����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������51
West Asian Quad����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 54
QUAD������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 57
WTO’s Ruling Against India’s Tech Tariffs���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 59

3. SOCIETY �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 62
Child Malnutrition in India������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 62
India’s Higher Education����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 64
Integrated Medicine������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 67

4. ECONOMICS ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 71
De-dollarisation�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 71
Decarbonizing Steel Sector�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������73
Gig Workers and Code on Social Security, 2020���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 75
Green Hydrogen Fuel���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 77
Insolvency in the Aviation sector������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 80
India’s Toy Economy�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������83
Insurance Sector in India���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 86
Pokhran Tests and India’s Nuclear Progress������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������88
Small Modular Reactors������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������92
The Economics of Climate Change in India�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 94
Transitioning Away from LIBOR���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������97
US Debt Ceiling Crisis���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������98
Armed Forces (Special Powers) Act (AFSPA)�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 100
Manipur Insurgency���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 102
Women in Armed Forces������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 107

5. ENVIRONMENT ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������109
Forest Fires������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 109
Greenwashing�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 111
State of India’s Environment Report 2023������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 116
UNEP Report on Plastic Pollution��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 116

6. SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������120


Drone Technology������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 120
LIGO-India Project������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 122
NavIC Satellite system����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 125

7. ETHICS - CASE STUDY OF THE MONTH��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������128


CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

POLITY

CRIMINALIZATION OF POLITICS
CONTEXT
A report by the Association for Democratic Reforms (ADR) on Karnataka assembly elections has revealed that the number of
candidates with declared criminal cases has increased in all three parties in the state between the 2018 elections and now.
WHAT IS CRIMINALIZATION OF POLITICS?
ˆ Criminalization of politics is defined as the situation when criminals participate in the politics of the government, i.e., contest
elections and get elected to the Parliament and state legislatures.
ˆ Supreme Court called criminalization of politics an “extremely disastrous and lamentable situation”, and raised concerns
about “unsettlingly increasing trend” in the country.

Stats IQ: Growing trend of criminal politics in India


� There is an increase of 109% (in 2019) in the number of MPs with declared serious criminal cases since 2009.
� 29% of those elected to the Lok Sabha in 2019 have declared serious crimes.
� Association for Democratic Reforms (ADR) analysis shows that candidates facing criminal charges had double the chances of winning
as compared to those with clean record.
� A recent report by National Election Watch (NEW) and ADR has analyzed the criminal background in the recent cabinet, which is
summarized here as follows:
‒ Out of 78 ministers, 33 (42%) ministers have declared criminal cases against them.
‒ 24 (31%) ministers have reported serious criminal cases against them, such as rape, murder, robbery, etc.
‒ Four ministers have cases against them related to Section 307 of the Indian Penal Code, 1860.
‒ Five ministers have cases against them related to promoting communal disharmony.
‒ Five ministers have declared cases of electoral violations against them.
‒ Furthermore, ADR also stated in his report that the proportion of Union ministers who have declared criminal cases against them
has risen by 3%.

REASONS FOR THE CRIMINALIZATION OF POLITICS


ˆ Vote Bank: Individuals and political parties do astronomical expenditure for buying the votes and for other illegitimate
purposes. The politician’s link with the constituency gives rise to political crime.
ˆ Corruption: Corruption is also an important factor in the criminalization of politics. The corrupted political member uses his
powers for winning the elections not in a fair manner.
ˆ Lack of Governance: The origin of the problem of the criminalization of politics is mainly the country’s poor governance
capacity.
‒ On one hand, excessive procedures are used by India to allow the bureaucracy to insert into the ordinary life of people
while on the other hand, it appears that it is woefully understaffed to perform its most crucial functions.
ˆ Lack of intra-party democracy: In India, there is a lack of intra-party democracy, and the top leadership takes the decision on
the candidates contesting elections. Thus, politicians with criminal records are able to escape the scrutiny of the ground level
workers and organization of the party.
ˆ Other reasons for criminalization of politics include:
‒ A partisan interfering in the investigation of crime and poor prosecution of cases.
‒ Massive delays of cases of criminal candidates over the years and high cost that is involved in the judicial proceedings.
‒ Unwarranted granting of parole and abundance withdrawal of the court cases.
EFFECTS OF CRIMINALIZATION OF POLITICS
ˆ Affects good governance: When people with a criminal background become elected representatives, they may use their
position to further their criminal interests. This negatively impacts the efficacy of the democratic process in delivering good
governance.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


4
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Limits the choice of voters: When criminals participate in politics and become candidates, it limits the choice of voters to elect
a suitable candidate. This undermines the principle of free and fair elections, which is the foundation of democracy.
ˆ Increases corruption: Criminals in politics may use their position to promote corruption, which leads to increased circulation
of black money during and after elections. This affects the working of public servants and undermines the integrity of the
electoral process.
ˆ Reduces people’s faith in democracy: The involvement of criminals in politics can lead to social disharmony, violence, and set
a bad precedent for future generations. This can reduce people’s faith in democracy as a system of governance.
ˆ Undermines the quality of elected representatives: When people with criminal backgrounds become lawmakers, it reflects
poorly on the nature of India’s state institutions and the quality of its elected representatives. It can further lead to ineffective
governance and policymaking.

The Vohra Committee (1993) on Criminalization of Politics


ˆ The Vohra Committee was a high-level committee formed by the Indian government in 1993 to investigate the nexus between organized
crime, politicians, and bureaucrats in the country.
ˆ The committee was formed in the wake of increasing concerns about the involvement of organized crime syndicates in politics and the
resultant criminalization of politics in India.
ˆ The committee submitted its report in October 1993, which contained several important findings and recommendations.
Some of the key findings of the report were:
ˆ The nexus between organized crime and politics was deep-rooted and extensive, with criminals involved in a wide range of illegal
activities such as extortion, smuggling, and drug trafficking.
ˆ There was evidence of a nexus between criminals and politicians, with criminals providing money and muscle power to politicians in
exchange for protection and support.
ˆ The problem of criminalization of politics was not limited to any particular region or political party but was widespread across the
country.
Some of the key recommendations were:
ˆ Strengthening of law enforcement agencies to tackle organized crime. Creation of a national database of criminals.
ˆ Electoral reforms to prevent candidates with criminal backgrounds from contesting elections.
ˆ Strict enforcement of existing laws to ensure that politicians with criminal backgrounds are disqualified from holding public office.

LEGAL PROVISIONS FOR DISQUALIFICATION OF CRIMINAL CANDIDATES


ˆ In this regard, Indian Constitution does not specify as to what disqualifies a person from contesting elections for the
Parliament, Legislative assembly or any other legislature.
ˆ The Representation of Peoples Act 1951 mentions the criteria for disqualifying a person for contesting an election of the
legislature.
‒ Section 8 of the act, i.e., disqualification on conviction for certain offences, according to which an individual punished with
a jail term of more than two years cannot stand in an election for six years after the jail term has ended.
‒ The law does not bar individuals who have criminal cases pending against them from contesting elections therefore the
disqualification of candidates with criminal cases depends on their conviction in these cases.
JUDICIAL MEASURES TO CONTROL CRIMINALIZATION OF POLITICS
ˆ In Union of India (UOI) v. Association for Democratic Reforms and Anr, 2002, the SC held that every candidate, contesting an
election to the Parliament, State Legislatures or Municipal Corporation, has to declare their criminal records, financial records
and educational qualifications along with their nomination paper.
ˆ In Ramesh Dalal vs. Union of India, 2005, the SC held that a sitting MP or MLA shall also be subject to disqualification from
contesting elections if he is convicted and sentenced to not less than 2 years of imprisonment by a court of law.
ˆ The SC in Public Interest Foundation vs Union of India case, 2018 had also directed political parties to publish online the
pending criminal cases of their candidates.
‒ In this case, the court left the matter of disqualification of politicians carrying criminal charges against them, to the
Parliament saying that the court cannot add to the grounds of disqualification.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


5
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

SUGGESTIONS TO CONTROL THE CRIMINALIZATION OF POLITICS


ˆ Election Commission Recommendations: The Election Commission in its “Proposed Electoral Reforms” (2016) recommended
that persons charged with cognizable offences should be debarred from contesting in the elections, at the stage when the
charges are framed by the competent court provided the offence is punishable by imprisonment of at least 5 years, and the
case is led at least 6 months prior to the election in question.
ˆ 2nd ARC Recommendations: The Second Administrative Reforms Commission in its fourth report on Ethics in Governance
(2008) made the following recommendations:
‒ Section 8 of RPA needed to be amended to disqualify all persons facing charges related to grave and heinous offences and
corruption, where charges have been framed six months before the election.
‒ It also supported the proposal of including the filing of false affidavits as an electoral offence under Section 31 of
Representation of the People Act, 1950.

DELHI GOVT VS CENTRE


CONTEXT
The Central government has promulgated an ordinance to nullify the Supreme Court’s recent verdict to give the Delhi government
powers over administrative services in the national capital.
ABOUT THE CENTRAL GOVERNMENT’S ORDINANCE
ˆ The ordinance, promulgated by the President of India, seeks to amend the Government of National Capital Territory of Delhi
Act, 1991.
ˆ The ordinance extends powers to the Delhi lieutenant governor (LG) over services in the administration of the national
capital – basically, the power to transfer and appoint bureaucrats posted to Delhi.
ˆ The ordinance seeks to establish for the first time the National Capital Civil Service Authority (NCCSA).
‒ NCCSA will be headed by the Chief Minister of Delhi, with the Chief Secretary and Principal Home Secretary of Delhi as
its other two members.
‒ The authority will decide the transfer, posting and vigilance matters of all Group A officers and DANICS officers posted
in Delhi through majority votes.
‒ The ordinance stated that the LG will pass orders to give effect to the recommendations passed by the NCCSA.
‒ In case the LG differs with the recommendation made, the LG may, for reasons to be recorded in writing, return the
recommendation to the Authority for reconsideration by the Authority.
‒ However, the final decision will lie with the Lieutenant Governor of Delhi, the ordinance said.
RECENT SUPREME COURT (SC)’S VERDICT ON THE ISSUE
ˆ Recently, a five-judge constitutional bench of the Supreme Court held that the Delhi Govt will have legislative and executive
control over administrative services in the National Capital Territory of Delhi (NCTD) except with regard to public order, police
and land.
ˆ Key highlights of the verdict:
‒ Powers of LG: Ruling in Delhi govt’s favour, the SC held that the LG shall be bound by the decision of Delhi government
over services, apart from public order, police and land.
‒ Federalism in UTs: The Centre had argued that the Constitution is a federal Constitution with a strong unitary bias as far as
UTs are concerned. Contradicting it, SC said that Indian federalism is not unitary and any further expansion of the Union’s
power will be contrary to the Constitutional scheme.
‒ Principle of triple chain of accountability: The SC stated that Article 239AA establishes a legislative assembly for NCT of
Delhi. Members of the legislative assembly are elected by the Delhi electorate. If a democratically elected government
is not given the power to control the officers, the principle of triple chain of accountability (Political, Administrative and
Public accountability) will be redundant.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


6
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Principle of collective responsibility: It extends to the responsibility of officers, who in turn report to the ministers. If the
officers stop reporting to the ministers or do not abide by their directions, the entire principle of collective responsibility
is affected.
CURRENT GOVERNANCE MODEL OF NEW DELHI

Article 239: It deals with the Administration of Union territories. It has two provisions:
ˆ A Union territory shall be administered by the President acting through an administrator to be appointed by him with
such designation as he may specify, except as otherwise provided by Parliament.
ˆ The President may appoint the Governor of a State as the administrator of an adjoining Union territory, and he shall
exercise his functions independently of his Council of Ministers.

ˆ Delhi enjoys special status in India. The National Capital Territory of Delhi Act (NCTDA), 1991 created Delhi as a special union
territory with the features of a state.
ˆ The 69th Amendment of the Constitution in 1991 gave Delhi the special status.
‒ The amendment inserted new Articles 239AA and 239AB after Article 239A of the Constitution.
ˆ As per Article 239AA:
‒ The ‘Union Territory of Delhi’ came to be known as the ‘National Capital Territory of Delhi’ (NCT).
‒ The ‘Lieutenant Governor’ (LG), became the administrator of the NCT.
‒ A Legislative Assembly with the power to make laws for the NCT with respect to the matters in the State List and
Concurrent List of the Constitution was set up.
‒ However, the Legislative Assembly was not empowered to make laws on public order, the police, and land.
‒ A Council of Ministers and a Chief Minister for Delhi was set up to ‘aid and advice’ the LG on those matters that the
Legislative Assembly was empowered to make laws on.
‒ In case of a difference of opinion, LG shall refer it to the President for decision and act according to the decision given
thereon by the President.
ˆ Article 239AB: It provides for president’s rule in Delhi when the administration of the territory cannot be carried on in
accordance with the provisions of Article 239AA. The President’s rule is imposed on a report from the LG.

GOVERNMENT OF NATIONAL CAPITAL TERRITORY OF DELHI (AMENDMENT) ACT, 2021


ˆ It amended the Sections 21, 24, 33 and 44 of the Government of National Capital Territory of Delhi Act, 1991.
ˆ Key provisions of the amendment include:
‒ Meaning of government: The Amendment Act mentions that the term “government” in any law made by the Legislative
Assembly shall mean the L-G.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


7
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Lt. Governor’s upper hand: The act makes it necessary for the Delhi government to obtain the opinion of the lieutenant
governor before taking any executive action.
‒ Making rules: The Amendment Act bars the Assembly or its committees from making rules to take up matters concerning
day-to-day administration, or to conduct inquiries in relation to administrative decisions.
‒ Statement of objects & reasons of the Act: The Union government claims that the amendment Act seeks to give effect to
the Supreme Court’s interpretation and that it “further defines” the responsibilities of the elected government and the Lt
Governor in line with the Constitutional scheme.
WHAT ARE KEY ISSUES WITH THE CURRENT MODEL OF GOVERNANCE OF DELHI?
ˆ Undermining the elected government: The LG, who will be the government, is under no obligation to implement any law
passed by the assembly or carry out the directions of the house as he is not responsible to the assembly.
ˆ Lack of Executive Accountability: The Lieutenant Governor, who is the head of government, is not accountable to the
assembly, which undermines the principle of executive accountability.
ˆ Against the privilege of legislature: Framing the rules to conduct its proceedings is thus a part of the privilege each house of
a legislature enjoys.
ˆ Delay in decision-making: The requirement for LG’s approval for many decisions has led to delays in decision-making, which
has impacted the development and governance of the city.
ˆ Accountability issues: The division of responsibilities between the elected government and the Lieutenant Governor has led
to difficulties in fixing responsibility for actions and decisions.
ˆ Against Co-operative Federalism: The Act not only negates cooperative federalism but also upturns the fundamental principles
laid down by the Supreme Court in Government of NCT Delhi vs Union of India case (2018).
ˆ Control over Services Department: Governance has always been a contentious issue since Delhi is not a full state and the
Services department comes under the L-G.
WHAT ARE THE ARGUMENTS AND COUNTERARGUMENTS IN THE ISSUE?
ˆ Argument by the Centre: The Centre has consistently maintained that because Delhi is the national capital and the face of
the country, it must have control over administrative services, which include appointments and transfers.
ˆ Arguments by the Delhi govt:
‒ The Delhi government has argued that in the interest of federalism, the elected representatives must have power over
transfers and postings.
‒ It had also contended that the recent amendments to the Government of National Capital Territory of Delhi (Amendment)
Act, 2021, violate the doctrine of basic structure of the Constitution.
PREVIOUS SUPREME COURT’S JUDGEMENTS ON THE ISSUE

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


8
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

What is an Ordinance?
ˆ Ordinances are like a law but not enacted by the legislature but rather promulgated by the President of India or governor of a state
when the legislature is not in session.
Ordinance Making Power of President
ˆ Article 123 deals with the ordinance making power of the President. The President has many legislative powers and this power is one
of them.
ˆ He can only promulgate the ordinance under these circumstances:
‒ When both the houses or either of the house is not in session,
‒ Circumstances occur where the President thinks it necessary to act without waiting for houses to assemble.
ˆ Properties of ordinance:
‒ For an ordinance to exist, it should be approved by the Parliament within six weeks of it being introduced.
‒ The maximum duration of an ordinance issued by the president of India can be 6 months and 6 weeks (In case of non-approval by
the Parliament).
‒ An ordinance can be retrospective in nature.
‒ The power of ordinance making is not to be taken as a substitute for the legislative power. Only under special circumstances,
ordinances can be rolled out.
‒ Ordinances cannot be used to revoke the fundamental rights of the citizens guaranteed by the Indian Constitution.
‒ The ordinance would also be declared null and void if both houses passed a resolution opposing it.
Limitations of an ordinance making power of President
ˆ The President can promulgate an ordinance only when both the houses are not in session or only one house is in session.
ˆ For an ordinance to be promulgated, such circumstances should be there which deem it necessary for the President to legislate through
the ordinance.
ˆ In RC Cooper vs. Union of India (1970) the Supreme Court, held that the President’s decision could be challenged on the grounds that
‘immediate action’ was not required; and the Ordinance had been passed primarily to by-pass debate and discussion in the legislature.

CASTE CENSUS
CONTEXT
The second phase of Bihar’s caste-based census will start from April 15.
BACKGROUND: CASTE CENSUS IN BIHAR
ˆ The process of caste-based census started in Bihar from January 7, 2023, which will be conducted in two phases. The
responsibility has been given to the General Administration Department (GAD) of the government.
ˆ Apart from government employees, Anganwadi workers and Jeevika Didis will be participating in conducting the caste
surveys.
ˆ First phase:
‒ The first phase of the survey began on January 7, 2023, and ended on January 21. The number of all households in the
Bihar were counted and recorded in the first phase.
‒ It recorded the name of the head of the family and the number of members living in the household.
ˆ Second phase:
‒ Data: Data collected in the first phase will be used in second phase calculations. The first phase data will be available to
the enumerators and supervisors at the time of second phase.
‒ Information sought: Data such as people living in the households, their castes, sub-castes, socio-economic conditions etc.
will be collected in the second phase.
9 Socio-economic indicators used: The socio-economic indicators include educational qualification, nature/status
of employment, vehicle ownership, land ownership (agricultural and residential), computer usage, housing status,
temporary migration status, and monthly income.
‒ Mandatory information: All the questions asked are mandatory but filling one’s Aadhaar number and ration card number
are optional. The survey will also record names of people living outside the state.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


9
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Bijaga App: Bijaga (Bihar Jaati Adharit Ganana) app is used in the second phase, which contains 17 columns and a list of
214 caste names.
‒ Double verifications: The survey information needs to be collected on both the mobile app and physical forms. This will
help in cross-verification of the data.
WHAT IS CASTE CENSUS?
ˆ Caste census is the practice of conducting caste-wise tabulation of
India’s population. It was last included in the Indian Census in 1931.
ˆ Every census conducted in independent India included information
on SC/STs but, enumerators do not collect data on other castes.
ˆ Importance of Caste census:
‒ Equitable representation: Caste census gives idea about
population of each caste, which allows for providing them
reservation based on their strength.
‒ Identifying marginalized groups: Caste census allows collection of
socio-economic status along with their caste. This helps identify
marginalized caste groups.
‒ Policy-making tool: Caste census provides the necessary
information that government needs while taking measures for
upliftment of a particular community, especially welfare schemes.
‒ Sub-categorization of quota: The data from caste census can
be used in sub-categorization of existing reservation quotas in
education and jobs.
‒ Bursting myths: Caste census will burst the myths about numerary strengths of particular caste group, allowing the
government to avoid placating them.
CONCERNS ABOUT CASTE CENSUS
‒ Data integrity: In many caste surveys, officials
do not insist on any kind of documents to
verify their claims. Statisticians feel that this
move would cast doubts on the integrity of
the collected data.
‒ Conflicts between castes: Data from caste
census has the capability to create conflict
between castes as members may demand for
higher quota in reservation.
‒ Politicization: The whole process has the
potential to become highly politicized as
political parties may use the data for their
electoral gains.
‒ Demand for inclusion in caste categories:
Castes currently outside reserved pool
may demand for their inclusion in those
categories. This may start a never-ending cycle of demands from various castes.
WAY FORWARD
ˆ Data integration: The data collected from SECC could be integrated with other data to arrive at a better picture regarding
status of various castes.
ˆ Modern data analysis: Data collected from various sources could be analyzed using latest data analytical tools before arriving
at a conclusion.
‒ This information could be then validated by domain experts in various States.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


10
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Caste census in India


ˆ Caste census in India began in 1871 during the colonial rule.
However, the practice was discontinued after the 1931 Census.
‒ The Socio-Economic Caste Census (SECC) 2011 was the
first such caste census after the 1931.
ˆ The SECC was not conducted under the 1948 Census of India
Act as the disclosure of information was not mandatory.
ˆ Government’s position:
‒ Data accuracy: The Union governments have categorically
stated that data collected through caste census are not
completely accurate, making them unsuitable for use in
policy-making.
‒ Administrative difficulty: Adding caste data in census
process will further create complexities in census process.
This is another reason for its non-inclusion.

FREEDOM OF PRESS IN INDIA


CONTEXT
India’s rank in the World Press Freedom Index 2023 has witnessed a fall, attaining 161st rank out of 180 countries.
DECODING THE NEWS: PRESS FREEDOM INDEX
ˆ Press Freedom Index is an annual report released by Reporters Without Borders (RSF). The index aims to compare the level
of press freedom enjoyed by journalists and media in 180 countries and territories.
‒ RSF is a Paris-headquartered international NGO whose self-proclaimed aim is to defend and promote media freedom.
ˆ Basis of evaluation: Calculation is based on five contextual indicators: political context, legal framework, economic context,
socio-cultural context and safety.
ˆ Important trends:
‒ Norway, Ireland and Denmark occupied the top three positions, while Vietnam, China and North Korea made up the
bottom three.
‒ In India’s neighborhood, Pakistan was placed at 150, while Sri Lanka improved its ranking to 135th this year as against
146th in 2022.
FREEDOM OF PRESS
ˆ According to Reporters Without Borders (RWF), press freedom is defined as “the ability of journalists as individuals and
collectives to select, produce, and disseminate news in the public interest independent of political, economic, legal, and
social interference and in the absence of threats to their physical and mental safety”.
ˆ Constitutional basis of Freedom of Press
‒ The Constitution of India guarantees freedom of speech and expression under Article 19, which deals with ‘Protection of
certain rights regarding freedom of speech, etc.
‒ Freedom of press is not explicitly protected by the Indian legal system but it is implicitly protected under Article 19(1) (a)
of the constitution, which states - “All citizens shall have the right to freedom of speech and expression”.
‒ However, Freedom of press in India is also not absolute. Restrictions are placed on Article 19(2) on following conditions:
9 Interests of the sovereignty and integrity of India
9 The security of the State
9 Friendly relations with foreign States

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


11
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

9 Public order
9 Decency or morality
9 Contempt of court
9 Defamation or incitement to an offence

Judicial Opinion on Freedom of Press


ˆ In Romesh Thaper vs State of Madras and Brij Bhushan vs State of Delhi, the Supreme Court explicitly stated that the freedom of the
press was an essential part of the right to freedom of speech and expression.
‒ Freedom of speech and expression included propagation of ideas, and that freedom was ensured by the freedom of circulation.
ˆ In Union of India v/s Association for Democratic Reforms, the apex court said that freedom of speech and expression includes the right
to impart and receive information which includes freedom to hold opinions.
‒ The court said that Freedom of press has three essential elements:
9 Freedom of access to all sources of information
9 Freedom of publication
9 Freedom of circulation
ˆ In Sakal Papers v/s Union of India, the court observed that the Daily Newspapers (Price and Page) Order, 1960, which fixed the number
of pages and size which a newspaper could publish at a price, was held to be violative of freedom of press and was not a reasonable
restriction under the Article 19(2).

IMPORTANCE OF FREEDOM OF PRESS


ˆ Uphold people’s right: Press freedom is important to raise concerns about violation of people’s right. In absence, such rights
get suppressed under the might of the state.
ˆ Accountability of the government: Accountability is the basic feature of democracy and government of the day must be held
liable for their actions. This can only be ensured through freedom of press.
ˆ Propagating ideas: Press is a medium of communication that allows propagation of ideas among the citizens. New ideas allow
the democracy to flourish.
ˆ Foundations of democracy: Press/media is the fourth pillar of democracy as it acts as a bulwark against state power. It also
acts as a link between the government and the people.
ˆ Awareness creation: Free press keeps citizens educated about happenings around the world as well the country.
CHALLENGES/THREATS TO FREEDOM OF PRESS
ˆ Fake news: The trust of citizens on press has deteriorated due to increasing instance of fake news. It is becoming challenging
to separate real news from fake ones.
ˆ Paid news: Politicians and influential people use their money power to plant news that is favourable to them. This has
converted media into propaganda machinery.
ˆ Attack on journalists: Journalists have lost their lives for exposing misdeeds of people in power. Such attacks have deterred
them from performing their duties.
ˆ Corporate control: Influential media channels are being acquired by rich corporate. This reduces their independence, making
them tool in the hands of powerful personalities.
ˆ Political bias: Many media companies are owned by individuals having close links to political parties. Their content is usually
biased towards a particular political party.

Government’s measures to control press


ˆ Draft IT Amendment Rules 2023: It allows the IT ministry to appoint the fact-check body, which has powers to label online content
related to the Union Government as “fake” or “misleading”.
‒ If any piece of information is marked as fake by the fact check unit, online intermediaries will be required to take it down.
ˆ IT Amendment Rules 2022: Social media intermediaries are required to address complaints regarding the removal of specified prohibited
content within 72 hours.
‒ In case of failure, the intermediaries will lose their safe harbor provisions under Section 79 of the IT Act 2000.
ˆ Section 69A of IT Act 2000: It gives powers to the Central and State governments to issue directions “to intercept, monitor or decrypt
any information generated, transmitted, received or stored in any computer resource”.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


12
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

WAY FORWARD
ˆ Declining press freedom is a concern for India, as it showcases the country in poor light. Despite the concerns around the
methodology of the index, the quality of press has significantly declined in India.
ˆ Self-regulation: To reinstate trust in press, media companies must come together to self-regulate their activities. Actions must
be taken for failure to perform their duties.
ˆ Safety of journalists: Efforts must be made by the government to increase safety of journalists. This will enable them to
perform their duties without fear.
ˆ Reduce state control: India is one of the top countries where cases have been filed against journalists. Constructive criticism
of policies must be allowed, ensuring journalists perform their duties independently.
ˆ Attaining media freedom: Establishing plurality in ownership, better legal frameworks, and steps to reduce the influence of
vested interest groups are needed to restore independent media.

INTERNET INDIA REPORT


CONTEXT
IAMAI and market data analytics firm Kantar have brought out the Internet India Report that has captured internet usage in India.
STATS IQ: INTERNET USE IN INDIA

Active internet ˆ More than half of Indian citizens, which equals to 759 million, are active internet users and access the internet at
users least once a month.
ˆ This active internet base in India is expected to grow to 900 million by 2025.

Rural and urban ˆ Among the active internet users in the country, 399 million are from rural parts, while 360 million are from urban
distribution parts. This shows that rural India is driving internet growth.
ˆ By 2025, 56 per cent of all new internet users in India will belong to rural India.

Regional divide ˆ Digital divide, as a result of disparity in penetration, has been the major impediment in internet growth in some
major states.
ˆ 32% of users in Bihar have less than half the level of internet penetration compared to the leading state Goa where
70% people are internet users.

Gender-wise ˆ Even though 54% of internet users are male, 57 per cent of all new users of internet in 2022 were females.
growth ˆ By 2025, it is estimated that 65 per cent of all new internet users will be women.

Popular internet ˆ Digital entertainment, digital communications and social media are the most popular internet-based services in
services India.
ˆ There is a 51 per cent year-over-year (YoY) growth in social commerce, indicating the increase in social media use.

Digital payments ˆ Digital payments have seen 13% growth over 2021 to reach an estimated 338 million users. Out of these, 36% are
from rural India.

WHAT IS INTERNET?
ˆ Internet is the global interconnected network of computers that uses the Internet protocol suite (TCP/IP) to communicate
between networks and devices.
ˆ Origin:
‒ The origins of the Internet can be traced to the development of packet switching and research initiated by the United
States Department of Defense in the late 1960s to enable time-sharing of computers.
‒ ARPANET, which was the primary precursor network, allowed interconnection of regional academic and military networks
to enable resource sharing.
‒ The transition to the modern Internet began after the linking of commercial networks and enterprises in the 1990s.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


13
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

WORKING OF INTERNET

IMPORTANCE OF INTERNET
ˆ Information dissemination: Internet is a medium of sharing information to the whole world. A person from any part of the
world can access information on the internet.
ˆ Development of business: The growth of e-commerce has helped many sellers to grow their business and expand their
customer base beyond local area.
ˆ Education: Internet technology has removed the distance barrier for learning. People in one part of the world can enroll in
courses offered in another part of the world.
ˆ Real-time communication: Internet has made it possible to communicate with each other on a real-time basis.
ˆ Remote working: Employees can work in companies across the world without physically being on the location. This has been
made possible by internet technology.
ˆ Governance: Digital governance will allow citizens to avail government facilities or relay their concerns without having to visit
offices. This is another important outcome of internet technology.
ˆ Financial actions: Share market trading, banking activities and other financial activities can be undertaken through internet-
based services.
CHALLENGES TO INTERNET TECHNOLOGY
ˆ Vulnerable to hacking: Interconnectedness between computers makes these devices vulnerable to hacking. This may affect
the performance and also the privacy of the user.
ˆ Creation of infrastructure: Mobile towers, optical cable networks or satellite-related infrastructure needs to be in place for
working of internet. Setting them up in inaccessible areas would be challenging.
ˆ Requires digital skills: Navigating internet needs certain amount of digital knowledge. Without this basic knowledge, internet
services cannot be accessed.
ˆ Restricted access: Access to internet is not absolute. The government and internet companies can restrict users’ access to
sites.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


14
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Security threats: Internet has become a platform for people trying to create unrest in the society. It gives them the required
knowledge and helps them coordinate their attacks.

Internet Regulation in India


ˆ Information Technology Act, 2000:
‒ The law gives legal sanction to electronic commerce and electronic transactions, enabling e-governance, and prevents cybercrime.
‒ The law has provisions for penalties for various cybercrimes and fraud through digital/electronic format.
ˆ Information Technology (amendment) Act, 2008:
‒ The act introduced Section 66A, which gave power to the authorities to arrest anyone accused of posting ‘offensive’ content on
social media.
‒ Section 69A allows government of India to intercept, monitor or decrypt any information generated, transmitted, received or
stored in any computer resource under certain circumstances.
‒ The section empowers the government of India to block internet sites in the interests of the nation. It also includes banning certain
apps.
ˆ Information Technology Intermediary Guidelines (Amendment) Rules, 2018:
‒ Under Section 79(2)(c), intermediaries are required observe due diligence while discharging their duties, and also follow prescribed
guidelines of the Indian Government.
‒ In case the government seeks information or assistance concerning cybersecurity, then the intermediaries must provide them the
same within 72 hours.
‒ Intermediaries are required to remove access to unlawful content within 24 hours.

WAY FORWARD
ˆ Multi-stakeholder approach: The present multi-take holder approach must be preserved and efforts should be made to
involve civil society actively in governance and decision making.
ˆ Dual edged sword: Like every other technology, internet has dual use. It can be used for both the welfare of society and
causing its disruption.
‒ Therefore there is a need to develop guidelines that will help in reaping benefits while keeping threats under check.

JURISDICTION CONFLICT IN DELHI


CONTEXT
The Supreme Court has pronounced its verdict on the dispute between the Centre and the Delhi Government over matters
pertaining to control over the transfers and overall functioning of administrative services in of Delhi.
MORE ON NEWS
ˆ Verdict of SC: The SC has held that the National Capital Territory of Delhi has legislative and executive power over administrative
services in the National Capital, excluding matters relating to public order, police and land.
‒ The SC also referred to cooperative federalism under which the Union of India must exercise its powers within the
boundaries created by the Constitution.
ˆ Constitutional Provisions: Due to the co-existence of Article 239AA and 239AB, there has been jurisdictional conflicts between
the Government of NCT and the Union Government and its representative, the Lieutenant Governor.
ˆ 2018 SC Judgement: The SC had given important judgments in Government of NCT of Delhi vs. Union of India case (2018)
which settled many contentious issues such as the powers of the Lt. Governor.
ˆ Delhi (Amendment) Act, 2021: However, the Government of National Capital Territory (GNCT) of Delhi (Amendment) Act,
2021 gave more powers to the LG of Delhi.
‒ It also reduced the powers of both the elected government and the Legislative Assembly.
ˆ Against this backdrop, let us look at some important events pertaining to the jurisdiction of Delhi.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


15
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Cooperative Federalism: Cooperative federalism implies the Centre and states share a horizontal relationship, where they cooperate in
the larger public interest.
‒ It is visualised as an important tool to enable states’ participation in the formulation and implementation of national policies.
ˆ Competitive Federalism: It refers to the relationship between the Central and state governments (vertical) or between state governments
(horizontal).
‒ In a free-market economy, the endowments of states, available resource base and their comparative advantages all foster a spirit
of competition.
‒ States need to compete among themselves and also with the Centre for benefits.
ˆ 239AA and 239AB: The 69th Amendment Act, 1992 added two new Articles 239AA and 239AB in the Indian Constitution.
‒ It conferred Special Status upon Delhi following the recommendations of the S Balakrishnan Committee that was set up in 1987 to
look into Delhi’s demands for statehood.
ˆ According to Article 239AA, the NCT of Delhi will have an Administrator and a Legislative Assembly.
‒ The Legislative Assembly can make laws for the whole or any part of the NCT on matters enumerated in the State List or Concurrent
List except police, public order, and land.
ˆ Article 239AB provides that the President may by order suspend the operation of any provision of Article 239AA or of all or any of the
provisions of any law made in pursuance of that article.

BACKGROUND OF GOVERNMENT OF NCT OF DELHI VS. UNION OF INDIA CASE


ˆ As per the SC, the appointment of prosecutors is exclusively within the purview of the State government. Accordingly, The
Delhi government had appointed the public prosecutors for conducting the Delhi riot cases in the High Court.
ˆ However, the Lieutenant Governor (LG) stalled this decision, by referring it to the President under proviso to Article 239AA(4).
ˆ Moreover, the LG appointed all the prosecutors whose names were submitted by the Delhi Police (under the control of
Ministry of Home Affairs) and thus the State government’s list was rejected.
ˆ This development reignited the LG vs Delhi Government’s jurisdiction debate which the Supreme Court addressed in NCT of
Delhi vs. Union of India (2018).
KEY HIGHLIGHTS OF THE 2018 JUDGEMENT

Status ˆ Administration of Union Territory under Article 239(1) is different from Article 239AA which provides for
of Delhi an elected Legislature.
under the ˆ The court held that Parliament can legislate for Delhi on any matter in the State List and the Concurrent
Constitution List but the executive power in relation to Delhi except the ‘Police’, ‘Land’ and ‘Public Orders’ vests only
in the state government headed by the Chief Minister.
ˆ It also held that the executive power of the Union does not extend to any of the matters which come
within the jurisdiction of the Delhi Assembly.
LG to Act ˆ The court held that for establishing a democratic and representative form of government for NCT of
on ‘aid and Delhi, Government of Delhi that enjoys the confidence of the people of Delhi should have the functional
advice’ of the autonomy to legislate for the NCT of Delhi.
Council of ˆ Hence, through the judgement, the Supreme Court settled the law in regard to the ‘aid and advice’ of the
Ministers
Council of Ministers by affirming that the LG is bound to act on the aid and advice except in respect of
‘Land’, ‘Public Order’ and the ‘Police’.
ˆ The Court also made it clear that there is no requirement of the concurrence of the Lt. Governor and that
he has no power to overrule the decisions of the State Government.
LG Cannot ˆ Article 239AA (4) says that in the case of a difference of opinion between the LG and his Ministers on any
Refer ‘every’ matter, the LG shall refer it to the President for final decision and act according to it.
Matter to the ˆ However, the court inferred that the words ‘any matter’ employed in the proviso to Article 239AA (4)
President cannot be inferred to mean ‘every matter’.
ˆ The power of the Lieutenant Governor under the said proviso represents the exception and not the
general rule which has to be exercised in exceptional circumstances by the LG.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


16
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Limited ˆ Normal administrative matters should not be referred to the President because it would disturb the
References concept of Constitutional governance, principles of collaborative federalism and the standards of
to be Made Constitutional morality.
to the ˆ The Court also held that the President is the highest Constitutional authority and his decision should be
President
sought only on constitutionally important issues.
Unresolved ˆ The SC did not very clearly delineate the issues in respect of which the Lt. Governor can refer a decision
Area in the taken by the Council of Ministers to the President in the event of a difference of opinion between the Lt.
Judgement Governor and the State government.

KEY PROVISIONS: GOVERNMENT OF NATIONAL CAPITAL TERRITORY (GNCT) OF DELHI (AMENDMENT)


ACT, 2021
ˆ The Act amended the Government of National Capital Territory of Delhi Act, 1991.
ˆ The Act amended certain powers and responsibilities of the Legislative Assembly and the Lieutenant Governor.
ˆ Restriction on Laws Passed by the Assembly: The Act provides that the term “government” referred to in any law made by
the Legislative Assembly will imply Lieutenant Governor (LG).
ˆ Rules of Procedure of the Assembly: The Act provides for rules made by the Legislative Assembly of Delhi to be “consistent
with the rules of the House of the People” or the Lok Sabha.
ˆ Inquiry by the Assembly into Administrative Decisions: The Act prohibits the Legislative Assembly from making any rule to
enable itself or its Committees to:
‒ Consider the matters of day-to-day administration of the NCT of Delhi and
‒ Conduct any inquiry in relation to administrative decisions.
ˆ Assent to Bills: The Act requires the LG to also reserve those Bills for the President which incidentally cover any of the matters
outside the purview of the powers of the Legislative Assembly.
ˆ LG’s Opinion for Executive Actions: All executive action by the government, whether taken on the advice of the Ministers or
otherwise, must be taken in the name of the LG.
‒ It also adds that on certain matters, as specified by the LG, his opinion must be obtained.
Way Forward
ˆ The Constitutional morality requires strict adherence to the constitutional principles of collaborative federalism, constitutional
balance and the concept of constitutional governance. All these principles act as bulwark against the usurpation of powers of
the State by the Union.
ˆ Also, the constitutional scheme adopted for Delhi conceives of the Council of Ministers as the representatives of people and
the Lt. Governor as the nominee of the President who must function in harmony within the Constitutional parameters.
ˆ Hence, the Lt. Governor should not emerge as an adversary having a hostile attitude towards the Council of Ministers of Delhi;
rather, he should act as a facilitator.

LEGALIZING CANNABIS CULTIVATION


CONTEXT
Recently, a team of legislators of Himachal Pradesh visited Uttarakhand to explore the possibility of Cannabis legal cultivation in
Himachal Pradesh.
ABOUT CANNABIS
ˆ Cannabis refers to a group of three plants with psychoactive properties, known as Cannabis sativa, Cannabis indica, and
Cannabis ruderalis.
ˆ Cannabis is made up of more than 120 components, which are known as cannabinoids. Two of them are:
‒ Cannabidiol (CBD): This is a psychoactive cannabinoid, yet it’s non-intoxicating and non-euphoric.
‒ It’s often used to help reduce inflammation and pain. It may also ease nausea, migraine, seizures, and anxiety.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


17
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Tetrahydrocannabinol (THC): This is the main psychoactive compound in cannabis. THC is responsible for the “high” that
most people associate with cannabis.
ˆ Cannabis cultivation traces all the way up
to 12,000 years ago, suggesting it was one of
humanity’s oldest cultivated crops.
ˆ Traditional value: Some scholars speculate that
it may be the main ingredient of the ritual Vedic
drink ‘soma’, mentioned in both the Rigveda
and the Bhagavad Gita.
ˆ Regulation: The 1961 Single Convention on
Narcotic Drugs put down stringent controls for
the manufacture and consumption of drugs
including cannabis.
CANNABIS CULTIVATION IN INDIA
ˆ India banned the cultivation of cannabis plant
under the Narcotic Drugs and Psychotropic
Substances (NDPS) Act.
‒ Currently, charas, ganja, or any mixture
or drink prepared from the two products
are banned in India under the NDPS Act,
regardless of hemp cultivation.
ˆ Exemption to Ban: Section 10 (a) (iii) of the Act
empowers States to make rules regarding the
cultivation of any cannabis plant, production,
possession, transport, consumption, use,
purchase, sale, and consumption of cannabis (except charas).
‒ States are empowered to permit, by general or special order, the cultivation of hemp, only for obtaining fibber or seeds
or for horticultural purposes.
‒ Uttarakhand became the first State in the country to legalise cannabis cultivation in 2017 for industrial use.
ˆ Central government has also given legal status to the cultivation of cannabis in some districts of Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh
and Uttar Pradesh.
ˆ Controlled cultivation of cannabis has been permitted in several European Union countries including Uruguay, Canada, USA,
Austria, Belgium and the Czech Republic.
SIGNIFICANCE OF LEGALISING CANNABIS CULTIVATION
ˆ Revenue for Government: Given India’s production capacity of cannabis, the government stands to benefit in terms of tax.
‒ India alone accounted for 6 percent of the world’s cannabis herb seizures in 2016 and even higher quantities in 2017.
ˆ Rural economy: It will improve the economy in rural areas and the income of the state government will also increase.
‒ In parts of Himachal such as Kullu and Mandi, hemp had traditionally been used for making footwear, ropes, mats, food
items, etc.
ˆ Culinary importance: During snowfall in Himachal Pradesh, a dish is prepared from cannabis seeds to keep people warm and
energetic.
ˆ Overall benefits: The legalization of marijuana can help create jobs, battle stress, improve human concentration, resolve
medical problems and provide sustainable agricultural incomes, among other things.
CONCERNS WITH CULTIVATION OF CANNABIS
ˆ Diversion: The use of cannabinoids is not a first-line therapy and could be diverted for purposes other than medical.
ˆ Mental Health: Its use may increase the risk of developing clinical depression or exacerbate the signs of any existing mental
illnesses.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


18
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Impair Brain functioning: It may be more difficult to concentrate, learn, and retain information.
ˆ Lungs damage: Lungs may swell
and become itchy from its smoke.
ˆ Underweight newborns: Pregnant
women who use cannabis run
an increased risk of having
underweight or preterm newborns.
CONCLUSION
ˆ Its availability in the market or
human usage have not been
stopped by prohibition or making
it illegal.
ˆ Cannabis has possible hazards,
which is why it must be subject to
legal regulation.
ˆ Cannabis should be safely
produced by qualified farmers,
packed and tested in appropriate
facilities, and sold by respectable
and licenced sellers rather than
being left in the hands of an
unregulated criminal market.

MODEL PRISONS ACT, 2023


CONTEXT
The Ministry of Home Affairs has finalized a comprehensive Model Prisons Act, 2023 aimed at holistic reform of prisons and
prison management in line with modern-day needs and with a firm focus on correctional ideology.
ABOUT THE MODEL PRISONS ACT, 2023
ˆ The model law was drafted by the Bureau of Police Research and Development, as per directions of the home ministry.
ˆ The new model Act, which not only seeks to modernize the 130-year-old Prisons Act, 1984 but also assimilates updated
provisions of the of Prisoners Act and The Transfer of Prisoners Act, 1950.
ˆ It is meant to serve as a guiding document for the states to bring matching amendments in their prison laws, with whatever
modifications they may consider necessary.
ˆ The aim of the model Act is also to protect the society from the criminal activities of hardened criminals and habitual
offenders, even as focus is laid on vocational training and skill development of the jail inmates to ease their reintegration into
the society after release.
SALIENT FEATURES OF MODEL PRISONS ACT, 2023
ˆ Provision for punishment of prisoners and jail staff for use of prohibited items like mobile phones etc. in jails;
ˆ Provision of security assessment and segregation of prisoners and individual sentence planning;
ˆ Provision for the use of technology in prison administration with a view to bringing transparency;
ˆ Proposes separate accommodation for women prisoners and transgender prisoners in the interest of their safety and well-
being;
ˆ A grievance redressal system for prisoners, a prison development board and an attitudinal change towards prisoners is
proposed.
ˆ The model Act also provides for video conferencing with the courts and scientific and technological interventions in prisons
as part of reforming prison management.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


19
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ It also has a provision for establishment of high-security jails for high-risk prisoners as well as open and semi-open jails for
low-risk ones.
ˆ Importantly, the Act provides for legal aid to prisoners, apart from encouraging and incentivizing good conduct by prisoners
through the provision of parole, furlough and premature release etc.
PRISONS AND THEIR GOVERNANCE IN INDIA
ˆ Prisons serve as correctional homes that are designed to punish
and rehabilitate individuals who have been convicted of crimes.
ˆ They are an integral part of the criminal justice system (CJS)
that deals with crime prevention, investigation, prosecution,
punishment and correction.
ˆ Prison governance in India:
‒ Prison is a State subject under List-II of the Seventh Schedule
in the Constitution.
‒ The modern prison system was conceptualised by TB
Macaulay in 1835.
‒ The management and administration of Prisons falls
exclusively in the domain of the State Governments, and is
governed by the Prisons Act, 1894 and the Prison Manuals
of the respective State Governments.
‒ However, the Ministry of Home Affairs provides regular
guidance and advice to States and UTs on various issues
concerning prisons and prison inmates.
NEED FOR REFORMS IN INDIAN PRISONS
ˆ Overcrowding of prisons: According to the ‘Prison Statistics 2021’, the average prison in the country has an occupancy rate
of 130%.
‒ This undermines the ability of prison systems to meet the basic needs of prisoners, such as healthcare, food, and
accommodation.
‒ This also endangers the basic rights of prisoners, including the right to have adequate standards of living and the right to
the highest attainable standards of physical and mental health.
ˆ Undertrials: Based on the ‘Justice India Report 2022’, 77 percent of the prisoners were undertrials. The pendency of cases is
a main reason for undertrials remaining in prison.
‒ As these awaiting trial inmates come into touch with their incarcerated inmates, they get influenced into the world of
crime.
ˆ Custodial Tortures /Deaths: Brutal physical treatment in custody by police official is another major problem of jails in India.
‒ According to the National Human Rights Commission (NHRC) in the last decade (2010-2020) on an average 5 people died
in judicial custody every day.
ˆ Staff shortage: India’s prisons are understaffed by at least 33 per cent with the highest vacancies found at the officer and
correctional staff levels.
‒ This has increased the workload of the staff and is having an impact on the ‘correctional’ aspect of imprisonment.
ˆ Lack of infrastructure: Most jails in India suffer from lack of basic prison infrastructure such as sleeping quarters, hygienic
washrooms, and health clinics.
‒ The budgetary support for prison system has not increased proportionally to the population.
ˆ Hygiene: Indian prisons are considered some of the most unhygienic in the world. Prisoners housed in these prisons suffer
from diseases such as jaundice, hepatitis etc.
ˆ Issues of women prisoners: There is a severe lack of female staff, inadequate numbers of toilets, bathrooms and other basic
preconditions for sanitation and hygiene. They also remain particularly vulnerable to custodial sexual abuse.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


20
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Insufficient Legal Aid: There are many accused individuals who are forced to stay in prison due to their inability to pay legal
fees to fight their case.
ˆ Mentality of the system: People involved in prison management suffer from a colonial hangover, which prescribes harsh
treatment for prisoners. They still believe that prisoners must be treated harshly.
VARIOUS COMMITTEES AND THEIR SUGGESTIONS ON PRISON REFORMS

Justice Mulla Committee ˆ All India cadre for prison staff and bringing prison under the concurrent list;
(1983) ˆ Government should form a National Policy on Prisons;
ˆ Government to use alternatives to imprisonment such as community service etc.

Justice V. R. Krishna Iyer ˆ Separate institutions with women employees alone for women offenders;
Committee on Women ˆ Necessary provisions to restore the dignity of women even if convicted.
prisoners (1987)

Committee under the ˆ It used the reports of Justice Mulla Committee Report and Justice Krishna Iyer Committee and made
Chairmanship of Director several additional and new recommendations.
General, Bureau of Police ˆ It also drafted a National Policy on Prison Reforms and Correctional Administration, 2007.
Research and Development
(BPR&D) (2005)

Justice Amitava Roy Panel ˆ Overcrowding:


on Prison Reforms (2018) ‒ Special fast-track courts should be set up to deal with petty crimes;
‒ Lawyers – Prisoners Ratio: There should be at least one lawyer for every 30 prisoners;
ˆ Understaffing:
‒ The Supreme Court should pass directions to start the recruitment process against vacancies;
‒ There should be use of video-conferencing for trials;
ˆ Prisoners:
‒ Every new prisoner should be allowed a free phone call a day to his family members to see him
through his first week in jail;
‒ Alternative punishments should be explored.

VARIOUS INITIATIVES FOR THE IMPROVEMENT OF CONDITIONS IN INDIAN PRISONS


ˆ Modernisation of Prisons (MoP) Project: Government of India has decided to provide financial assistance to States and UTs,
through MoP for using modern-day security equipment in Prisons for
‒ Enhancing the security of jails and
‒ To facilitate the task of reformation and rehabilitation of prisoners through correctional administration programmes.
ˆ E-Prisons Project: The E-Prisons project aims to introduce efficiency in prison management through digitization.
ˆ Model Prison Manual 2016: The manual provides detailed information about the legal services (including free services)
available to prison inmates.
ˆ Fast Track Courts: Fast Track Courts (FTC) are the type of courts that provide swift justice and are established after consultation
with respective High Courts.
ˆ e-Courts Project: The project will streamline the judicial processes and transform the Indian Judiciary by ICT enablement of
Courts. This will reduce pendency in the judiciary and help the litigants.

NEW PARLIAMENT BUILDING


CONTEXT
The Prime Minister inaugurated the New Parliament building recently during which a commemorative coin of Rs 75 denomination
was also released.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


21
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

THE OLD PARLIAMENT BUILDING


ˆ It is a colonial-era building designed by British architects Sir Edwin
Lutyens and Herbert Baker, which took six years to construct
(1921-1927).
ˆ Originally called the Council House, the building housed the
Imperial Legislative Council.
ˆ It is popularly believed that the unique circular shape of the
Chausath Yogini temple in Morena, (Madhya Pradesh) had
inspired the colosseum design of the Council House.
ˆ The Parliament building witnessed the addition of two floors in
1956 to address the demand for more space.
ˆ In 2006, the Parliament Museum was added to showcase the 2,500 years of rich democratic heritage of India.
ˆ The building had to be modified to a large extent to suit the purpose of a modern Parliament.
NEED FOR A NEW PARLIAMENT BUILDING
ˆ Narrow Seating Space for MPs: The present building was never designed to accommodate a bicameral legislature for a full-
fledged democracy. The number of Lok Sabha seats has remained unaltered at 545 and is likely to increase substantially after
2026. The Central Hall has seating capacity only for 440 persons. When the Joint Sessions are held, the problem of limited
seats amplifies. Due to limited space for movement, it is also a huge security risk.
ˆ Distressed Infrastructure: Over the period addition in services like water supply lines, sewer lines, air conditioning, fire-
fighting, CCTV, Audio Video system, which were not originally planned, have led to seepages and destroyed the overall
aesthetics of the building. The fire safety is a major concern as the building is not designed according to the present fire
norms. Numerous new electric cables have been put up which are potential fire hazards.
ˆ Obsolete Communication Structures: In the present Parliament House, the communications infrastructure and technology is
antiquated. The acoustics of all the halls need major improvement.
ˆ Safety Concerns: There are structural safety concerns of the building. The current Parliament building was built when Delhi
was in Seismic Zone-II, currently it is in Seismic Zone-IV.
ˆ Inadequate Workspace for Employees: With increasing demand for workspaces, inner service corridors were converted into
offices which resulted in poor quality and narrow workspaces. To accommodate ever increasing space requirements, sub-
partitions were created within existing workspaces, leading to crammed offices.
NEW PARLIAMENT BUILDING AND ITS KEY FEATURES
ˆ The new parliament building was under construction for the last three years as part of the ambitious Rs 20,000 crore Central
Vista plan.
ˆ The Central Vista plan aims to undertake several projects to revamp the government infrastructure in the national capital
which has not seen significant changes for several decades.
ˆ The master plan of the project was conceived in September 2019, a few months before the Covid-19 pandemic began.
ˆ Key features of the new parliament building include:

Triangular Design of the Building

ˆ The new building will have a triangular shape to reflect the importance of triangles being a
sacred geometry in various religions, while its interiors will have three national symbols as their
main themes -- Lotus, Peacock and Banyan Tree.
ˆ The building’s triangular plot has three main spaces -- Lok Sabha, Rajya Sabha and a Central
Lounge.
ˆ The triangular shape also ensures optimum space utilisation.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


22
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Spacious Legislative Chambers

ˆ Based on India’s national bird peacock, the new Lok Sabha will have thrice the current seating
capacity at 888 seats, while there will be 348 seats for Rajya Sabha, which is based on the Lotus
theme - the national flower.
ˆ As per the new floor plan, the Lok Sabha hall will be able to accommodate 1,272 seats for joint
sessions.

The state-of-the-art ‘Constitutional Hall’

ˆ This is a new addition to the Parliament complex symbolically and physically puts the citizens “at
the heart of the democracy,” the Central Vista project website states.
ˆ In the new complex, the offices have been designed in an ‘ultra-modern’ fashion, geared with the
latest communication technologies and are extremely secure and efficient.
ˆ It also carries a thoughtfully designed library to give a “superior experience”, equipped to serve
the members with the relevant information.

‘Sengol’ as a symbol of transfer of power:

ˆ The ‘Sengol’ sceptre carries significant historical significance as it was gifted to Jawaharlal Nehru,
India’s inaugural Prime Minister, representing the handover of authority from the British colonial
rule.
ˆ Derived from the Tamil word ‘semmai,’ which means “Righteousness”.
ˆ It has been installed in the Lok Sabha chamber, right next to the Speaker’s chair.

Other Key Features ˆ Energy Efficient Building: With a focus on energy efficiency, the new complex is a “platinum-rated
green building” and showcases India’s “commitment towards sustainable development.”
ˆ Divyang-friendly: To promote inclusivity, the new Parliament complex is also ‘divyang-friendly’.
ˆ Art Works: The building will also host many regional artworks to promote the diverse cultural
heritage of the country.

THE FEATURES OF THE NEW RS 75 COMMEMORATIVE COIN


ˆ Shape and Diameter: The coin is circular in shape with a diameter of 44mm.
ˆ Composition: The coin is made of a quaternary alloy, which consists of 50% silver, 40% copper, 5% nickel, and 5% zinc.
ˆ Obverse Side: The face of the coin features the Lion Capitol of Ashoka Pillar in the center. Below the Ashoka Pillar, the
inscription “Satyameva Jayate” in Hindi, which is the national motto of India, is inscribed.
‒ On the left periphery of the coin, the word “Bharat” is written in Devnagri script, and on the right periphery, the word
“INDIA” is written in English.
ˆ Reverse Side: The reverse side of the coin displays an image of the new parliament building.
‒ The upper periphery of the coin has the inscription “Sansad Sankul” written in Devanagari script, which means “Parliament
Complex.”
‒ On the lower periphery, the words “Parliament Complex” are written in English.
ACQUIRING AND SPENDING OF COMMEMORATIVE COINS
ˆ If someone wants to acquire commemorative coins, they can do so by visiting the website of the Securities of Printing and
Minting Corporation of India Limited (SPMCIL).
ˆ Most often, such coins are meant to be just collectables as their worth may not necessarily be the same as their face value-
they are partially made of precious metals such as silver or gold; The latest commemorative coin is 50 percent silver.
ˆ For instance, in 2018, the government issued a commemorative coin of Rs 100 denomination to honour former Prime
Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee but it’s currently available on SPMCIL’s website for ₹5,717.
ˆ This coin is 50 percent silver, and has other metals.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


23
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

POWER TO MINT COINS


ˆ The power to design and mint coins in India rests with the central government, as per the Coinage Act, 2011.
ˆ The government has the authority to determine the design, specifications, and denominations of coins.
ˆ The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) plays a role in the distribution of coins that are supplied by the central government.
ˆ Regarding commemorative coins, the central government has the discretion to release them based on its own choice.
ˆ However, it can also mint commemorative coins upon receiving requests from third parties. For example, in the past,
commemorative coins have been issued to honour notable individuals like actor and politician Late MG Ramachandran and
Carnatic singer MS Subbalakshmi. These decisions were made in response to requests made by Sri Shanmukhananda Fine
Arts & Sangeetha Sabha for the MS Subbalakshmi commemorative coins and by the Tamil Nadu government for the MG
Ramachandran commemorative coins.
ˆ All coins, including regular circulation coins and commemorative coins, are minted at the four mints owned by the Government
of India. These mints are located in Mumbai, Hyderabad, Kolkata, and Noida.
ˆ The country released its first commemorative coin in 1964 in honour of Jawaharlal Nehru, who had passed away that year.

PROMULGATION AND RE-PROMULGATION OF ORDINANCES


CONTEXT
Recently, the Central government has promulgated an ordinance to nullify the Supreme Court’s recent verdict that give the
Delhi government powers over administrative services in the national capital.
WHAT IS AN ORDINANCE?
ˆ An ordinance is an executive order issued by the President of India or governor of a state, that holds the same force and effect
as an Act passed by the Parliament.
ˆ This step is taken when both or either of the houses is not in session due to break and there is an urgent requirement of a
law to be passed on an important issue concerning public interest.
ˆ The constitutional provision of ordinance promulgation has been taken from the Govt. of India Act 1935.
PROMULGATION OF ORDINANCES BY THE PRESIDENT OF INDIA
ˆ Article 123 deals with the ordinance making power of the President. The President has many legislative powers and this
power is one of them.
ˆ He can only promulgate the ordinance under these circumstances:
‒ When both the houses or either of the house is not in session,
‒ Circumstances occur where the President thinks it necessary to act without waiting for houses to assemble.
ˆ Properties of an ordinance:
‒ For an ordinance to exist, it should be approved by the Parliament within six weeks of it being introduced.
‒ The maximum duration of an ordinance issued by the president of India can be 6 months and 6 weeks (In case of non-
approval by the Parliament).
‒ An ordinance can be retrospective in nature.
‒ The power of ordinance making is not to be taken as a substitute for the legislative power. Only under special
circumstances, ordinances can be rolled out.
‒ Ordinances cannot be used to revoke the fundamental rights of the citizens guaranteed by the Indian Constitution.
‒ The ordinance would also be declared null and void if both houses passed a resolution opposing it.
SUPREME COURT’S JUDGEMENT ON ORDINANCE MAKING POWER
ˆ RC Cooper Case 1970: Supreme Court in RC Cooper vs. Union of India (1970) held that the President’s decision to promulgate
ordinance could be challenged on the grounds that ‘immediate action’ was not required, and the ordinance had been issued
primarily to bypass debate and discussion in the legislature.
ˆ DC Wadhwa Case 1987: The issue of frequent promulgation of ordinances was again brought up in the Supreme Court through
a writ petition.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


24
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ The petition was regarding the promulgation of 256 ordinances between 1967 and 1981 in Bihar.
‒ This included 11 ordinances that were kept alive for more than 10 years and famously dubbed as ordinance raj.
‒ The Supreme court held that the legislative power of the executive to promulgate ordinances is to be used in exceptional
circumstances and not as a substitute for the law-making power of the legislature.
ˆ Krishna Kumar Singh V/S the State of Bihar, 2017: Supreme Court held that the authority to issue ordinances is not an absolute
entrustment, but is “conditional upon satisfaction that circumstances exist rendering it necessary to take immediate action”.
REPROMULGATION OF ORDINANCES
ˆ The Constitution of India in Article 123 and Article 213 are silent on repromulgations which could have two implications, first
that the silence is permissive and second that the silence is prohibitive.
ˆ An example of repromulgation of ordinances is the ‘Land Acquisition Ordinance’ passed by the BJP government in 2014.
Even though it lapsed after the six-week period in the Parliament and ceased to exist, it was repromulgated, and then
repromulgated again nearly 3 times until it was passed.
‒ The Government was aware that they lacked support in the Upper House for it to pass there, and hence kept repromulgating
the ordinance multiple times as the Constitution is silent on it, hence misusing their power.
ˆ In Krishna Kumar Singh V/S the State of Bihar, 2017, the Supreme Court held that re-promulgation of ordinances is a “fraud”
on the Constitution and a subversion of democratic legislative processes, especially when the government persistently avoids
placing the ordinances before the legislature.
‒ The court clarified that there might be circumstances permitting the re-promulgation of an Ordinance — however, it said,
repeated re-promulgations without bringing the Ordinance to the legislature would usurp the legislature’s function, and
will be unconstitutional.
PROMULGATION OF ORDINANCE BY THE GOVERNOR OF A STATE
ˆ Article 213 of the Indian Constitution empowers the Governor of the State to promulgate ordinances when the State
Legislative Assembly is not in session.
ˆ Governor’s power of ordinance making is quite similar to the President’s power. The comparisons between this two w.r.t.
Ordinance making is given below:

Ordinance Making Power of President Ordinance Making Power of Governor


He can promulgate ordinance when either Lok He can promulgate ordinance when the Legislative Assembly is not in session in case
Sabha or Rajya Sabha is not in session or if both of the unicameral legislature or when both Legislative assembly and council are not in
are not in session. session in case of a bicameral legislature

He can roll-out an ordinance for only those He can roll-out an ordinance for only those matters on which state legislature can make
matters on which Parliament (Lok Sabha & laws
Rajya Sabha) can make laws

His ordinances have the same effect on policies His ordinances have the same effect on policies as state’s acts will have. If his ordinance
as parliament’s acts will have. legislates on matters which state government has no power on, the ordinance stands
null and void.

The ordinance introduced by him can be The ordinance introduced by him can be withdrawn anytime.
withdrawn anytime.

His power to promulgate ordinance is not a His power to promulgate ordinance is not a discretionary power. Council of Ministers’
discretionary power. Council of Ministers’ (headed by CM) advice is a pre-requisite.
(headed by PM) advice is a pre-requisite.

No instructions are needed by President’s when President’s instructions on the following three cases are must:
he promulgates an ordinance. 9 If a bill containing the same provisions would have required the previous
sanction of the President for its introduction into the state legislature.
9 If he would have deemed it necessary to reserve a bill containing the same
provisions for the consideration of the President.
9 If an act of the state legislature containing the same provisions would have
been invalid without receiving the President’s assent.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


25
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

WHAT ARE THE ISSUES ASSOCIATED WITH THE ORDINANCE ROUTE OF LEGISLATION?
ˆ Usurpation of Legislative Power: The ordinance route allows the executive to bypass the legislature and make laws in urgent
situations, but it undermines the legislative power by extending the life of an ordinance through repromulgation, effectively
circumventing the requirement for parliamentary approval.
ˆ Undermining the Doctrine of Separation of Powers: Repromulgation of ordinances without specific numeric limits undermines
the principle of separation of powers by allowing the executive to make permanent legislation without adequate legislative
scrutiny or input.
ˆ Shortcomings in Legislative Scrutiny: Ordinances are subject to less rigorous legislative scrutiny compared to bills passed
through the regular parliamentary process. This can lead to potential shortcomings in terms of thorough examination,
amendment, and stakeholder consultation.
ˆ Lack of Parliamentary Debate: Ordinances are often promulgated without extensive debate or input, as they are issued by the
executive without the comprehensive legislative deliberation that takes place in parliament.
ˆ Ignoring Supreme Court’s Judgements: Despite the Supreme Court’s judgments on the use of ordinances, both the central
and state governments have often ignored the court’s observations and continued to repromulgate ordinances repeatedly,
disregarding the need for legislative deliberation and approval.

RELIGIOUS CONVERSION IN INDIA


CONTEXT
The Uttar Pradesh Government has released figures on conversion cases and arrests made under the Uttar Pradesh Prohibition
of Unlawful Conversion of Religion Act between January 2021 and April 2023.
MORE ON THE NEWS
ˆ The government stated that majority of cases were reported in Bareilly, and that 185 victims confessed that they were
forcibly converted.
ˆ The release of the figures comes against the backdrop of the government backing the controversial film “The Kerala Story”,
which is centred around conversions.
WHAT IS RELIGIOUS CONVERSION?
Religious conversion refers to the process of changing one’s religious beliefs, practices, or affiliations. It involves the adoption of
a new religion or a set of beliefs by renouncing one’s previous religion or set of beliefs.
REASONS FOR RELIGIOUS CONVERSION
There are various reasons why people convert their religion:
ˆ Personal spiritual growth: People may convert to a new religion because they feel that it resonates with them spiritually and
helps them grow as a person.
ˆ Marriage: In some cases, people may convert to their spouse’s religion to maintain family harmony or to show commitment
to their partner.
ˆ Social pressure: People may feel pressured to convert to a particular religion in order to fit into a certain social group or
community.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


26
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Religious conflict: People may convert to a new religion in order to escape persecution or discrimination based on their
previous religion.
ˆ Economic reasons: In some cases, people may convert to a new religion in order to gain access to economic opportunities or
resources that are only available to members of that religion.
HAS RELIGIOUS CONVERSION BEEN MENTIONED IN THE CONSTITUTION?
ˆ The word “conversion” has not been explicitly mentioned in the Indian Constitution.
ˆ However, Article 25 of the Constitution guarantees the freedom of religion to all individuals, including the freedom to
“propagate” their religion.
ˆ The term “propagate” has been interpreted to mean the right to spread or disseminate religious beliefs, and it is often
debated whether this includes the right to actively convert others to one’s religion.
ANTI-CONVERSION LAWS IN INDIA
ˆ Prior to India’s independence, several princely states headed by Hindu royal families enacted laws restricting religious
conversions in an attempt to preserve Hindu religious identity in the face of British missionaries.
‒ These anti-conversion laws were introduced during the latter half of the 1930s and 1940s and were made to protect the
cultural identity of the princely states.
‒ Examples of states that had such laws include Kota, Bikaner, Jodhpur, Raigarh, Patna, Surguja, Udaipur, and Kalahandi,
among others.
ˆ Post-independence:
‒ No Central Law: Currently, there are no central laws restricting or regulating religious conversions. Following India’s
independence, Parliament introduced a number of anti-conversion bills, but none were enacted.
‒ State Laws: Over the years, several states enacted “Freedom of Religion” legislation to restrict religious conversions
carried out by force, fraud, or inducements.
9 “Freedom of Religion laws” are currently in force in eight states — (i) Odisha (1967), (ii) Madhya Pradesh (1968),
(iii) Arunachal Pradesh (1978), (iv) Chhattisgarh (2000 and 2006), (v) Gujarat (2003), (vi) Himachal Pradesh (2006 and
2019), (vii) Jharkhand (2017), and (viii) Uttarakhand (2018).
9 The laws passed in Himachal Pradesh (2019) and Uttarakhand also declare a marriage to be void if it was solemnised
for the sole purpose of conversion, or a conversion was done solely for the purpose of marriage.
9 In November 2019, citing rising incidents of forced or fraudulent religious conversions, the Uttar Pradesh Law
Commission recommended enacting a new law to regulate religious conversions. This led the state government to
promulgate the recent Ordinance.

ISSUES WITH ANTI-CONVERSION LAWS


There are several issues associated with anti-conversion laws that include:
ˆ Freedom of religion: Anti-conversion laws can be seen as a violation of the right to freedom of religion, which is protected by
international human rights laws. These laws can restrict an individual’s ability to choose their own religion and can be used to
suppress minority religions.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


27
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Discrimination: Anti-conversion laws can be used to discriminate against certain religious groups, particularly minority
religions. In some cases, these laws have been used to target and persecute minority religious groups.
ˆ Coercion and manipulation: Some people argue that anti-conversion laws are necessary to prevent coercion and manipulation
in religious conversion. However, others believe that these laws are often used as a pretext to suppress minority religions and
restrict the right to freedom of religion.
ˆ Social and cultural divisions: Anti-conversion laws can contribute to social and cultural divisions within a community or
society, particularly if they are used to protect the dominant religion.
ˆ Conflict with other laws: Anti-conversion laws can sometimes conflict with other laws, such as laws that protect freedom of
expression or the right to freedom of association.
ˆ Effectiveness: Some argue that these laws are not effective in preventing religious conversion, while others believe that they
are necessary to protect the cultural and social cohesion of a community or society.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


28
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

JUDICIAL PRONOUNCEMENTS ON CONVERSION


ˆ Hadiya vs. Ashokan K.M: The Supreme Court held that an adult has the right to marry and convert to another religion of their
choice, and the state cannot interfere with this right.
ˆ Lata Singh vs. State of Uttar Pradesh: The Supreme Court ruled that an individual has the right to marry someone of their
choice regardless of their religion, caste, or social status, and any interference with this right is a violation of the right to
freedom of choice.
ˆ Sarla Mudgal vs. Union of India: The Supreme Court held that a person can convert to another religion for the purpose of
marriage, but the conversion should not be used as an excuse to evade legal obligations or responsibilities.
ˆ S. Pushpabai vs. C.T. Selvaraj: The Supreme Court ruled that an individual has the right to convert to another religion voluntarily,
and any coercion or misrepresentation in connection with religious conversion is a violation of the right to freedom of religion.
ˆ Rev Stanislaus Vs Madhya Pradesh, 1977: The Supreme Court concluded that the right to propagate does not include the
right to convert.
ˆ Recently, a Supreme Court bench led by Justice M.R. Shah said charity by religious groups is welcome but the intention of
such acts cannot be religious conversion. It also held that forced religious conversion is a “very serious issue” which can affect
national safety, freedom of religion and freedom of conscience.

Constitutional Provisions on Freedom of Religion


ˆ India has no state religion, nor it patronizes any specific religion. Religion is basically a matter of choice, faith or sets of belief.
ˆ Articles 25 to 28 of the Indian Constitution grant the right to freedom of religion to not only individuals but also religious groups in India.
ˆ Article 25 (Freedom of conscience and free profession, practice, and propagation of religion):
‒ Article 25 provides the freedom of conscience, the freedom to profess, practice, and propagate religion to all citizens.
‒ However, these freedoms can be restricted based on public order, health, and morality.
ˆ Article 26 (Freedom to manage religious affairs):
‒ The right to form and maintain institutions for religious and charitable intents.
‒ The right to manage its own religious affairs.
‒ The right to own and acquire movable and immovable property.
‒ The right to administer such property in accordance with law.
ˆ Article 27 (Freedom from payment of taxes for promotion of any particular religion):
‒ No person shall be forced to pay any taxes, the proceeds of which are specifically used in payment of expenses for the promotion
or maintenance of any particular religion or religious denomination.
ˆ Article 28 (Freedom to attend religious instructions):
‒ No religion instruction shall be allowed in any educational institution wholly maintained out of State funds.
‒ This condition shall not apply to an educational institution which is administered by the State but has been established under any
endowment or trust that mandates that religious instruction shall be imparted in such institution.
‒ Individual attending any educational institution recognized by the State or receiving aid out of State funds shall not be required
to take part in any religious instruction.

LAW COMMISSION RECOMMENDATION ON SEDITION


CONTEXT
The Law Commission of India released its 279th Report which recommended retaining the provision of Sedition under Section
124A of the Indian Penal Code, 1860.
MORE ON THE NEWS
ˆ In May 2022, the Supreme court had suspended the use of Section 124A, stalling pending criminal trials and court proceedings
under the section across the country.
‒ Section 124A of IPC describes sedition as ‘attempts to excite disaffection against the Government established by law’.
‒ The provision has been widely criticized for being a tool for curbing dissent.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


29
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ However, allegations were made by petitioners that arrests and prosecutions under Section 124A were continuing despite
the freeze.
ˆ The Union government responded regarding this conveying to the Supreme Court that it has initiated the process for
reexamining the sedition law (Section 124A of IPC).
ˆ Following this, Law Commission of India in its 279th Report recommended retaining the provision of Sedition under Section 124A.
RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE LAW COMMISSION
ˆ Incorporating the Kedar Nath Judgement: The Law Commission report states that the essence of Kedar Nath v Star of Bihar
(1962) needs to be incorporated in Section 124A.
‒ Kedar Nath upheld the constitutionality of the Sedition Law stating that it falls within the ‘reasonable restrictions’ on
freedom of speech mentioned under Article 19(2) of the Constitution.
‒ The Court ruled that the offence of sedition can be established when the words or actions tend to incite violence or lead
to public disorder.
‒ However, the report states that Section 124A, as it currently reads, fails to clearly cull out the meaning of these actions,
resulting in its vague interpretation.
ˆ Installing a New Procedural ‘Safeguard’:
‒ The Commission recommends a major procedural amendment to the Code of Criminal Procedure, 1973 (CrPC) to prevent
the ‘alleged misuse’ of the law.
‒ It suggests that a police officer, holding the rank of an Inspector or higher, must conduct a preliminary inquiry before the
First Information Report (FIR) is filed.
‒ Subsequently, based on the findings of the inquiry report, the Central Government may or may not grant permission to
file an FIR.
‒ This amendment is to be made to Section 154 of the CrPC.
‒ The Law Commission highlights that this recommendation was made after taking into consideration the observations of
the Supreme Court in S.G. Vombatkere regarding the potential misuse of the law.
ˆ Increasing the term of punishment:
‒ The Commission recommends enhancing the punishment to a period of seven years or life imprisonment, along with a
fine.
‒ Currently, the punishment is a period of imprisonment of either three years or life imprisonment.
‒ The report describes this punishment as ‘odd’ as there is a discrepancy among other provisions found in Chapter VI of IPC,
which lists the ‘Offences against the State’.
‒ Section 124A is found here. The report aims to address this inconsistency by aligning the punishment of Section 124A with
other provisions under Chapter VI.
ˆ Inserting New Words in the Provision:
‒ The Report recommends the insertion of the words ‘tendency to incite violence or cause public disorder’ in the provision.
‒ It defines ‘tendency’ as an ‘inclination to incite violence or public disorder rather than proof of actual violence or imminent
threat to violence’.
‒ Thus, the consequence of an action won’t be considered if ‘inclination’ is established.
‒ The Report highlights that Kedar Nath established that proof of violence is not necessary to establish the offence of
sedition.
‒ Instead, the Judgement primarily relies on the tendency of the words or actions to incite violence or disturb public order.
REASONS FOR RETAINING
The Report justifies retaining Section 124A on five aspects:
1. It is necessary to protect national security from the threat of radical, anti-national, and secessionist elements. They reasoned
that the growth of social media has played a role in propagating radical thoughts against India, often instigated and facilitated
by ‘adversarial foreign powers’.
2. It is a ‘reasonable restriction’ to the fundamental right of speech and expression found under Article 19(1)(a) of the Indian

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


30
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Constitution. They reasoned that the restrictions of ‘public order’, and ‘incitement to an offence’ fall within the ambit of
Sedition law.  
3. It is the ‘traditional penal mechanism’ to address the issue of terrorism. It argues that the mere presence of other counter-
terrorism and security laws, such as the Unlawful Activities Prevention Act, 1967, and the National Security Act, 1980, is not
a sufficient reason to abolish the sedition law. The report states that without the sedition law, individuals involved in seditious
activities could potentially be prosecuted under these special laws, which often carry more stringent provisions.  
4. The Report states that ‘colonial legacy’ is not a strong enough basis for striking down the law in India’s modern democratic
context. It points out that other colonial legacies like the Police Forces and All India Civil Services are still retained without
opposition on this ground.
5. The report highlights that in countries where sedition laws have been struck down, other laws addressing seditious activities
have been incorporated within their treason and counter-terrorism laws.
WHAT IS SEDITION?
ˆ Sedition under IPC 124A is defined as an attempt to bring
in hatred or contempt or excites or attempts to excite
disaffection towards the government established according
to the law.
‒ The expression “disaffection” includes disloyalty and all
feelings of enmity.
‒ Comments expressing disapprobation of Government
measures with a view to obtain their alteration by
lawful means, without exciting hatred, contempt or
disaffection, will not constitute an offence under this
section;
‒ Comments expressing disapprobation of the
administrative or Government action without exciting
hatred, contempt or disaffection, will not constitute an
offence under this section.
ˆ Sedition was included as an offence in 1890 under section
124A IPC through the Special Act XVII.
ˆ Punishment:
‒ It is a non-bailable law that is punishable with
imprisonment from three years up to life, along with a
fine.
‒ Individual charged under the law will be barred from
a government job and their passport is seized by the
government.
ˆ Origin of sedition law:
‒ Sedition comes under Section 124A Indian Penal
Code (IPC). The law was drafted by British historian-
politician Thomas Babington Macaulay in 1837.
‒ The British colonial government used the law to primarily suppress the writings and speeches of prominent Indian
freedom fighters.
9 Mahatma Gandhi, Lokmanya Tilak, and Jogendra Chandra Bose were some of the leaders who were charged under
the law, for questioning colonial administration.
‒ During process of constitution framing, the sedition law was opposed by members of Constitutional Assembly, such as
K.M. Munshi, who argued that such a draconian law is a threat to democracy in India.
‒ The word sedition was omitted from the Constitution due to the persistent efforts of Bhupinder Singh Mann.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


31
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Stats IQ: Sedition cases in India


ˆ NCRB data shows that sedition cases have risen from 47 in 2014 to 93 in 2019, a massive growth of 163 percent.
ˆ Conviction rate: The conversion rate from cases to conviction is a mere 3 percent.  
ˆ Highest cases: Assam (76), Haryana (42 cases), Jharkhand (40), Karnataka (38), Andhra Pradesh (32) and Jammu and Kashmir (29).
‒ These states accounted for more than half the number of total sedition cases recorded in the country.
ˆ Substantial cases: Manipur (28), Uttar Pradesh (27), Bihar (25), Kerala (25), Nagaland (17), Delhi (13), Himachal Pradesh (12), Rajasthan
(12) and West Bengal (12) registered cases in double digits.
ˆ Zero cases: Meghalaya, Mizoram, Andaman and Nicobar Islands, Chandigarh, Dadra and Nagar Haveli and Daman and Diu, and
Puducherry did not register any sedition cases.

JUDICIAL OPINION ON SEDITION LAW


ˆ The Supreme Court in Romesh Thapar vs. State of Madras (1950) held that criticism of the government exciting disaffection
or bad feelings towards it cannot be regarded as a justifying ground for restricting the freedom of expression and of the
press.
ˆ In Gopi Chand vs. The State (1951), and Ram Nandan vs. State of Uttar Pradesh (1959), courts declared that Section 124A of
the IPC was unconstitutional.
ˆ The Supreme Court in Kedar Nath Singh vs State of Bihar (1962) gave constitutional validity to sedition law.
‒ The court however said that unless accompanied by an incitement or call for violence, criticism of the government
should not be called sedition.
ˆ In Balwant Singh vs. State of Punjab (1995), the Supreme Court said that the real intent of the speech must be taken into
account before labeling it seditious.
ˆ In Rajat Sharma vs. the Union of India Case, 2021, the court ruled that disagreeing with the views and policies of the
government will not be considered sedition.
ˆ In Disha Ravi case, the Delhi High Court ruled that government cannot imprison citizens because of disagreeing with the
state policies.
ˆ In Farooq Abdullah case, the judiciary observed that expression of views of dissent, which is different from the opinion of the
government, cannot be termed seditious.
CRITICISM OF SEDITION LAW
ˆ Violation of freedom of speech: Fundamental Right of freedom of speech is violated by the sedition law. This is considered a
threat to democracy.
ˆ Poorly defined: Assessing the exact nature of speech that can be considered sedition is very difficult due to the poor definition
of the law. Distinguishing genuine expression of speech from seditious speech will be challenging.
ˆ Misuse: There have been numerous instances where governments have misused the sedition law to curb dissent. Political
opponents, journalists, social activists etc have been victims of the sedition law.
ˆ Colonial legacy: Sedition law is a colonial legacy, which was used mainly to overcome popular movement. It is thus appropriate
to give up this colonial burden.
ˆ Regular invoking: Sedition law was supposed to be an extraordinary instrument that was to be used only when security and
sovereignty of the country is threatened. However, it is invoked quite regularly, even on flimsy grounds.
ˆ Low conviction: The conviction rate of sedition law is about 3%. This shows that the law is mainly used to create fear and
silence any criticisms or dissent.
SUPPORT FOR SEDITION LAW
ˆ Territorial integrity: The law will help in tackling anti-national, secessionist and terrorist elements that threaten territorial
integrity of the nation.
ˆ Reasonable restriction: The Constitution allows reasonable restriction on freedom of speech and expression. This does not
violate the fundamental rights.
ˆ Stabilizing state: The sedition law protects the elected government from attempts to overthrow it using violence and illegal
means.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


32
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

WAY FORWARD
ˆ Democracy requires active participation of citizens in decision making process, including constructive criticisms of government
policies.
ˆ Sedition law has empowered the executive to use this ambiguous provision as an instrument to regulate public opinion and
indiscriminately wield power.
ˆ The need of the hour is to review this draconian law. Even if the law is not completely abolished, there has to be checks and
balances imposed so as to reduce the misuse.

SUB-CATEGORISATION OF OTHER BACKWARD CLASSES


CONTEXT
The Union Government has no records of office expenditure incurred for the Justice G. Rohini Commission for the sub-
categorisation of Other Backward Classes (OBC).
BACKWARD CLASSES IN INDIA
ˆ The Backward Classes suffer from disadvantages and disabilities which are age-old and which derive their sanction mainly
from the caste system.
ˆ The backward classes comprise roughly one-third of the total population in India. They are made up of:
‒ The Scheduled Tribes (adivasis)
‒ The Scheduled Castes (the Harijans)
‒ The Other Backward Classes
ˆ The characteristics of backwardness are mentioned in different articles of the Indian Constitution:
‒ Article 15 (4) speaks of social and educational backwardness.
‒ In Article 16 (4), mention is made of backward classes and their inadequate representation in services.
‒ Article 23 speaks of forced labour.
‒ Article 46 refers to weaker section of the people in which the scheduled castes and scheduled tribes are included.
WHO ARE OTHER BACKWARD CLASSES (OBCS)?
ˆ Non-untouchable: OBCs comprise the ‘non-untouchable’, lower and intermediary castes who were traditionally engaged in
agriculture, animal husbandry and handicrafts services.
‒ The OBCs are defined negatively, by what they are not.
ˆ They are neither part of the ‘forward’ castes at the upper end of the status spectrum, nor of the Dalits at the lower end.
‒ As per the Indian Constitution, they are socially and educationally backward classes.
ˆ Article 340: It gives the President the power to constitute a committee to investigate the conditions of backward classes in
India and recommend measures for their welfare.
RESERVATIONS FOR THE OBCS
ˆ Protective Discrimination: The constitution provides for the upliftment of the backward classes in the form of protective
discrimination. The policy of reservation is an instance of protective discrimination.
ˆ First Backward Classes Commission (1953): The Government under Jawaharlal Nehru appointed a commission to identify
backward classes other than the SCs and STs at the national level.
‒ It was headed by Kaka Kalelkar.
‒ The Commission submitted its report in 1956 and recommended that caste is an important measure of backwardness.
‒ The recommendations were rejected by the Union government as they failed to apply more objective criteria such as
income and literacy.
ˆ Second Backward Classes Commission (1978): It was appointed by the Janta Party Government in 1978.
‒ This Commission known as Mandal Commission submitted its report in 1982.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


33
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ It identified 3943 castes as OBC and recommended 27% reservation in government and semi-government jobs and
admission to educational institutions.
‒ In 1990, the Union Government headed by V.P. Singh issued an office memorandum extending 27% reservation to the
OBCs as recommended by the Mandal Commission.
‒ A number of writ petitions were filed in the Supreme Court questioning the said Memorandum.
ˆ Issue of Creamy Layer: The Supreme Court examined this issue and gave a landmark judgment in Indra Sawhney vs Union
of India Case (1992).
‒ The SC permitted the Union Government to reserve 27% of the jobs for the OBCs subject to the exclusion of the ‘creamy
layer’ among the OBCs.
ˆ A person with an annual income of ₹8 lakh and above is classified as “creamy layer” and cannot get the reservation benefits.

National Commission for Backward Classes


ˆ It is a body set up under the National Commission for Backward Classes Act, 1993.
ˆ 102nd Constitution Amendment Act, 2018 provides constitutional status to the National Commission for Backward Classes
(NCBC).
ˆ It has the authority to examine complaints and welfare measures regarding socially and educationally backward classes.
ˆ Previously NCBC was a statutory body under the Ministry of Social Justice and Empowerment.

WHAT IS SUB-CATEGORISATION OF OBCS?


ˆ Mandate: The idea is to create sub-
categories within the larger group of OBCs
for the purpose of reservation.
ˆ Reservation: OBCs are granted 27%
reservation in jobs and education under the
central government which has been a legal
debate.
ˆ Issue with Reservation: It has been perceived
that only a few affluent communities among
the over 2,600 included in the Central List of
OBCs have secured a major part of the 27%
reservation.
ˆ Need for Sub-categorisation: It would ensure
“equitable distribution” of representation
among all OBC communities.
ˆ Rohini Commission: The Commission was
formed in 2017 to sub-categorise nearly
3,000 OBC caste groups and recommend a
quota break-up for them.
‒ It was initially given 12 weeks to submit a report in this regard but has so far received 14 extensions.
TERMS OF REFERENCE OF ROHINI COMMISSION
ˆ To investigate the extent of inequitable distribution of reservation benefits among castes or communities in the broad
category of OBCs.
ˆ To develop the mechanism, criteria, norms and parameters for sub-categorisation within such OBCs using a scientific approach.
ˆ To begin the process of identifying and classifying the respective castes, communities, sub-castes in the Central List of OBCs.
ˆ To review the various entries in the Central List of OBCs and recommend changes to any repetitions, ambiguities,
inconsistencies, or spelling or transcription errors.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


34
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

PRELIMINARY FINDINGS OF ROHINI COMMISSION


The Commission analysed the data of 1.3 lakh central jobs given under OBC quota over the preceding five years and OBC
admissions to central higher education institutions. The findings were:
ˆ 97% of all jobs and educational seats have gone to just 25% of all sub-castes classified as OBCs.
ˆ 95% of these jobs and seats have gone to just 10 OBC communities.
ˆ 983 OBC communities (37% of the total) have zero representation in jobs and educational institutions.
ˆ 994 OBC sub-castes have a total representation of only 2.68% in recruitment and admissions.

CHALLENGES BEFORE ROHINI COMMISSION


ˆ Lack of Data: The absence of data for the population of various communities to compare with their representation in jobs
and admissions.
ˆ Lack of Survey: The Commission has been demanding appropriate Budget provision for a proposed all-India survey to
estimate the caste-wise population of OBCs.
ˆ Reluctance of Government: In 2018, the Home Ministry had announced that in Census 2021, data of OBCs will also be
collected, but since then the government has been silent on this.
WAY FORWARD
ˆ It is impossible to conduct an accurate sub-categorisation of Other Backward Classes groups without some form of a caste
census.
ˆ The Rohini Commission must incorporate the data from the last Socio-Economic Caste Census (SECC) conducted in 2011.
ˆ The sub-categorisation of OBCs can ensure the maximum reservation going to caste groups that have been historically crowded
out and minimum reservation for the dominant caste groups.

SUPREME COURT VERDICT ON JALLIKATTU


CONTEXT
A five-judge Constitution Bench of the Supreme Court has upheld the amendments made by Tamil Nadu, Maharashtra, and
Karnataka to The Prevention of Cruelty to Animals (PCA) Act, 1960, allowing Jallikattu, Kambala, and bullock-cart races.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


35
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

KEY HIGHLIGHTS OF THE JUDGEMENT


ˆ The court overturned the verdict of a two-judge Bench in ‘Welfare Board of India v. A. Nagaraja’ (2014), which had banned
practices such as Jallikattu.
ˆ The five-judge Bench noted that Jallikattu has been held in Tamil Nadu for at least a century, and “we will not disrupt the view
of the Tamil Nadu legislature that it is part of the cultural heritage of the state”.
ˆ The court upheld the validity of the ‘Prevention of Cruelty to Animals (Tamil Nadu Amendment) Act of 2017’, and ‘Prevention
of Cruelty to Animals (Conduct of Jallikattu) Rules of 2017’, and said that the amendment laws “substantially minimises” the
pain and suffering of the animals participating in the event.
ˆ The court also found similar laws passed by Karnataka and Maharashtra, allowing bullock cart races and buffalo racing
‘Kambala’, valid.
ˆ However, the court directed that the district administrations and competent authorities in Tamil Nadu would be responsible
to ensure that Jallikattu events are conducted in strict compliance of the safeguards laid out in the 2017 Amendment Act and
Rules.
WHAT IS JALLIKATTU?
ˆ Jallikattu is a traditional bull-taming sport that has been practiced in
the state of Tamil Nadu for centuries.
ˆ Jallikattu has been known to be practiced during the Tamil classical
period (400-100 BCE).
ˆ It is typically held during the Pongal harvest festival, which takes
place in mid-January.
ˆ The sport involves releasing a bull into an arena, and participants
attempt to grab and hold onto the bull’s hump for a specific period
of time or distance. It is considered a test of strength and skill for the
participants.
THE STORY OF LEGAL BATTLES OVER JALLIKATTU
ˆ The story of the ban on Jallikattu begins with concerns about animal cruelty.
ˆ Animal rights activists and organizations, including the Animal Welfare Board of India and People for the Ethical Treatment of
Animals (PETA), raised objections to the sport, claiming that it caused unnecessary harm and suffering to the bulls involved.
ˆ They argued that the bulls were subjected to physical abuse, such as beating, prodding, and twisting of their tails, and that
the sport violated the provisions of the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Act, 1960.
ˆ Supreme Court’s 2014 verdict:
‒ A two-judge Bench of the Supreme Court of India, in the case of ‘Welfare Board of India vs A. Nagaraja,’ banned Jallikattu
and similar practices.
‒ The Court ruled that the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Act superseded the so-called cultural and traditional aspects of
Jallikattu, emphasizing the importance of animal rights.
ˆ After math of the verdict:
‒ The ban on Jallikattu faced opposition from Tamil Nadu, where the practice is deeply rooted in the cultural heritage of
the state.
‒ Protests and public demonstrations took place, with supporters of Jallikattu arguing that it was an essential part of their
tradition, identity, and agrarian way of life.
ˆ Amendment to the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Act:
‒ In response to the widespread protests, the central government of India passed an amendment to the Prevention of
Cruelty to Animals Act in 2017, allowing Jallikattu and similar practices under certain conditions.
‒ The amendment placed specific regulations and safeguards to protect the welfare of the bulls and ensure the humane
conduct of the sport.
‒ And now, the Supreme Court has upheld the amendments to the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Act and allowed the
bull taming sport Jallikattu.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


36
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Arguments of opponents over Jallikattu:


‒ Animal Cruelty: Opponents argue that Jallikattu subjects the bulls to unnecessary pain, suffering, and abuse.
‒ Violation of Animal Welfare Laws: Jallikattu is seen as a violation of the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Act, 1960, which
aims to protect animals from unnecessary harm and suffering
‒ Safety Concerns: Jallikattu poses significant safety risks to both participants and spectators. The unpredictable nature of
bulls can lead to injuries and even fatalities.
‒ Alternative Cultural Expressions: Those against Jallikattu contend that cultural expressions should evolve over time and
adapt to changing societal values.
ˆ Arguments of proponents over Jallikattu:
‒ Cultural Heritage: Jallikattu is an integral part of Tamil Nadu’s cultural heritage and has been practiced for centuries.
‒ Economic Importance: Jallikattu is not just a sport but also an important economic activity. It promotes cattle breeding,
encourages the improvement of native breeds, and contributes to the livelihoods of farmers and land-owning castes.
‒ Proper Regulations: Supporters argue that instead of banning Jallikattu outright, the focus should be on implementing
and enforcing strict regulations to ensure the welfare of the animals involved.
THE LANDSCAPE OF ANIMAL WELFARE IN INDIA

Constitutional ˆ Article 48 A states that the state shall endeavor to protect and improve the environment and safeguard the
protection for country’s forests and wildlife.
animal rights ˆ Article 51 A (g) states that every citizen has a fundamental duty to safeguard and improve the natural environment
including forests, lakes, rivers, and animals as well as to have compassion for living creatures.
ˆ The above Constitutional provisions were introduced by the 42nd amendment in 1976.
ˆ These provisions are not directly enforceable by courts but provide a base for legislation, policies, and laws in
further animal protection at the central and state levels.
ˆ The concurrent list (Seventh Schedule) of the Indian Constitution gives power to central and state to make laws
on:
‒ Prevention of cruelty to animals,
‒ Protection of wild animals and birds.

The rights of ˆ Right to Life:


animals in India ‒ According to Article 21, everyone has the right to life and personal liberty and cannot be deprived of either,
unless established by law.
‒ The Supreme Court in the case of Animal Welfare Board of India v. Nagaraja (2014), specifically ruled on
Article 21 in favour of animals.
ˆ Right of compassion and preservation:
‒ The Supreme Court of India held in State of Gujarat v. Mirzapur Moti Kureshi Kassab Jamat (2005) that
the Parliament enacted Article 51A in order to be read with Articles 48 and 48A, thereby ensuring that all
provisions are read with the spirit of the law.
ˆ No animal shall be slaughtered:
‒ According to Rule 3 of Prevention of Cruelty to Animals, (Slaughterhouse) Rules, 2001 it is illegal to slaughter
any animal (including chickens) anywhere other than a slaughterhouse.
‒ Animals that are sick or pregnant must not be slaughtered.

Important Laws ˆ The Prevention of Cruelty Act, 1960:


in India for the ‒ The Act’s objective is to prevent the infliction of pain or suffering on animals and amend the laws related to
protection of the prevention of cruelty to animals.
animals ‒ The word ‘animal’ is defined as ‘any living creature other than a human being’.
‒ The Act prescribes for the establishment of the Animal Welfare Board of India (AWBI) to protect animals from
being subjected to unnecessary pain. The AWBI performs the following functions:
9 To advise the central government regarding amendments and rules to prevent unnecessary pain while
storing animals for experiments, transporting animals, etc.
9 To encourage financial assistance, animal shelters, and rescue homes for old animals.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


37
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

9 To advise the government on medical care and assistance for animal hospitals.
9 Imparting education and awareness on animal welfare using books, lectures, posters, advertisements.
9 To advise the central government regarding the general matters on animal welfare.
ˆ The Wildlife Protection Act,1972:
‒ The Act prohibits the killing, trapping, poaching, poisoning, or harming of any wild animal or bird.
‒ The definition of wildlife under the Act includes any animal, aquatic, or land vegetation that forms part of any
habitat.
‒ This Act is the first legislation that provides a broad list of endangered wildlife species.
‒ It also provides the establishment of wildlife advisory boards for the protection of wildlife in every state to
tackle the situation.
‒ The provisions for the protection of aquatic life (marine animals), birds, and zoo animals are also covered
under the Act.
‒ The Act allows the Center and State governments to declare any area ‘restricted’ for the wildlife sanctuary,
National park, etc.

SURROGACY IN INDIA
CONTEXT
The Centre in the Supreme Court has said that same-sex couples and live-in partners are not included in surrogacy and assisted
reproduction laws to avoid ‘misuse’ and provide children a ‘complete family’.
MORE ON THE NEWS
ˆ The response from the Centre is in response to a petition filed by a Chennai-based IVF specialist who challenged several
provisions of the Surrogacy Act, 2021 and the Assisted Reproductive Technology (Regulation) Act, 2021 as discriminatory
and violative of the reproductive rights of women and an impediment to the right to privacy.
ˆ The Government argued that including same-sex couples and live-in partners within the ambit of the Surrogacy Act could
lead to difficulties in ensuring a better future for the child born through surrogacy, hence their exclusion.
ˆ The government stated that the welfare of the child takes precedence over any notions of equality among prospective/
intending parents/couples.
ˆ The affidavit submitted by the Department of Health Research and the Indian Council of Medical Research further states that
despite the decriminalization of same-sex relations and live-in relations by the Supreme Court, no special provisions have
been introduced with respect to same-sex/live-in couples, nor have they been granted any additional rights.
WHAT IS SURROGACY?
ˆ Surrogacy is a practice where a woman agrees to carry and give birth to a child on behalf of another person or couple who
are unable to conceive or carry a pregnancy to term themselves.
ˆ The woman who carries the pregnancy is known as a surrogate, and she may use her own eggs or the eggs of the intended
mother or a donor, fertilized by sperm from the intended father or a donor.
ˆ Surrogacy is often used by couples who struggle with infertility or medical conditions that make it difficult or impossible for
them to conceive and carry a pregnancy.
ˆ In some cases, surrogacy may also be used by same-sex couples or single parents who wish to have a child.
ˆ In India, commercial surrogacy is not allowed, and surrogacy can only be carried out for altruistic purposes with strict
restrictions and no monetary consideration allowed.
TYPES OF SURROGACY
Based on genetic relationship: Traditional surrogacy and Gestational surrogacy.
ˆ Traditional Surrogacy: In traditional surrogacy, the surrogate mother uses her own eggs and is therefore the biological mother
of the child. Thus the child is genetically related to the surrogate mother and either the intending father or the sperm donor.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


38
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Gestational Surrogacy: In gestational surrogacy, an embryo is created through IVF using the eggs and sperm of the intending
parents or donors, and the embryo is implanted in the uterus of the surrogate mother. The child is genetically related to the
intending parents or donors and not the surrogate mother.
Based on the Payment to the Surrogate: Compensated/Commercial surrogacy and Altruistic surrogacy.
ˆ Compensated Surrogacy: Here the surrogate mother is paid beyond medical and other prescribed expenses, including
insurance coverage. This can also include the sale and purchase of human embryos for surrogacy.
ˆ Altruistic Surrogacy: In altruistic surrogacy, the surrogate mother does not receive any payment beyond medical and other
prescribed expenses, and is typically performed by a close friend or family member.
SURROGACY LAWS IN INDIA
Surrogacy (Regulation) Act, 2021
This Act aims to protect the rights of surrogate mothers, prevent the exploitation of women for commercial surrogacy, and
regulate the practice of surrogacy in India.
Provisions
ˆ Eligibility: A woman who is a widow or a divorcee between the age
of 35 to 45 years or a couple, defined as a legally married woman
and man, can avail of surrogacy if they have a medical condition
necessitating this option.
ˆ Altruistic surrogacy only: The law allows only altruistic surrogacy
where no money exchanges hands and where a surrogate mother is
genetically related to those seeking a child. Commercial surrogacy is
banned, and those who violate the ban can be punished with a jail
term of 10 years and a fine of up to Rs 10 lakhs.
ˆ Regulation of surrogacy clinics: The Act provides for the regulation
of surrogacy clinics, and requires them to be registered with the
appropriate authority. It also sets out guidelines for the functioning
of surrogacy clinics, including the duties and responsibilities of the
clinic, the medical procedures to be followed, and the rights of the
surrogate mother.
ˆ Protection of surrogate mothers: The law provides for the protection
of surrogate mothers, and requires that they be provided with
insurance coverage, medical care, and a safe and healthy environment. The Act also sets out the rights of the surrogate
mother, including the right to refuse to abort a child, and the right to maternity leave.
ˆ Penalty for non-compliance: The Act provides for penalties for non-compliance with its provisions, including fines and
imprisonment. It also sets out the procedure for filing complaints and seeking redressal of grievances.
ASSISTED REPRODUCTIVE TECHNOLOGY (ART)
ˆ The Assisted Reproductive Technology (Regulation) [ART] Act, 2021 defines ART to include all techniques that seek to obtain
a pregnancy by handling the sperm or the oocyte (immature egg cell) outside the human body and transferring the gamete
or the embryo into the reproductive system of a woman.
ˆ Examples of ART services include gamete (sperm or oocyte) donation, in-vitro-fertilization (fertilizing an egg in the lab), and
gestational surrogacy (the child is not biologically related to the surrogate mother).
ˆ ART services will be provided through:
‒ ART clinics, which offer ART related treatments and procedures, and
‒ ART banks, which store and supply gametes.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


39
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Key provisions of the Assisted Reproductive Technology (Regulation) [ART] Act, 2021

Regulation of ART ˆ The act provides that every ART clinic and the bank must be registered under ICMR’s National Registry of Banks
clinics and banks and Clinics of India.
ˆ The National Registry will act as a central database with details of all ART clinics and banks in the country.

Conditions for ˆ Screening of gamete donors, collection and storage of semen, and provision of oocyte donors can only be done
gamete donation by a registered ART bank.
and supply ˆ A bank can obtain semen from males between 21 and 55 years of age, and oocytes from females between 23
and 35 years of age.
ˆ An oocyte donor should be a married woman having at least one alive child of her own (minimum three years
of age).
ˆ The woman can donate oocytes only once in her life and not more than seven oocytes can be retrieved from her.
ˆ A bank cannot supply the gamete of a single donor to more than one couple seeking services.

Conditions for ˆ ART procedures can only be carried out with the written informed consent of both the party seeking ART services
offering ART as well as the donor.
services ˆ The party seeking ART services will be required to provide insurance coverage in the favour of the oocyte donor
(for any loss, damage, or death of the donor).
ˆ A clinic is prohibited from offering to provide a child of pre-determined sex.
ˆ The act also requires checking for genetic diseases before embryo implantation.

Rights of a child ˆ A child born through ART will be deemed to be a biological child of the couple (commission couple) and will be
born through ART entitled to the rights and privileges available to a natural child of the commissioning couple.
ˆ A donor will not have any parental rights over the child.

National and State ˆ The act provides that the National and State Boards for Surrogacy constituted under the Surrogacy (Regulation)
Boards Act, 2021 will act as the National and State Board respectively for the regulation of ART services.

SUPREME COURT JUDGEMENTS ON SURROGACY


ˆ Baby Manji Yamada case (2008): In this case, a Japanese couple had a child through a surrogate mother in India. However,
they got divorced before the child’s birth, and there were issues regarding the child’s citizenship and travel documents. The
Supreme Court held that the intended parents were the legal parents of the child, and ordered the Indian government to
issue a travel document for the child.
ˆ Jan Balaz case (2014): In this case, a German couple had twins through a surrogate mother in India. However, one of the
twins had Down Syndrome, and the couple refused to take him back to Germany. The Supreme Court held that the intended
parents had to take both children back to Germany, and that the surrogate mother had no parental rights over the children.
ˆ 2017 ban on commercial surrogacy: In 2017, the Supreme Court of India banned commercial surrogacy in the country,
except for cases where the surrogate mother is a close relative of the intending parents. The court cited concerns over the
exploitation of women and the commodification of children.
ˆ Shilpa Shetty case (2021): In this case, actress Shilpa Shetty and her husband were accused of illegally obtaining a child
through surrogacy. The couple denied the allegations, and the case is still ongoing.

UNIFORM CIVIL CODE


CONTEXT
The Law Commission has met the team of experts working on preparing a draft Uniform Civil Code for Uttarakhand.
WHAT IS UNIFORM CIVIL CODE?
ˆ The term “uniform” refers to rules that apply equally to all residents regardless of their sexual orientation, gender, or
affiliation with a particular religion.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


40
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ A Uniform Civil Code aims to provide one law for the entire country, applicable in their personal matters such as marriage,
divorce, inheritance, adoption etc.
ˆ Evolution of the idea of UCC:
‒ The idea of UCC can be traced back to colonial India when the British government submitted its report in 1835 stressing
the need for uniformity in the codification of Indian law relating to crimes, evidence, and contracts.
‒ Increased number of legislations dealing with personal issues during the British rule forced the government to form the B
N Rau Committee to codify Hindu law in 1941.
‒ The 1937 Act was reviewed and the committee recommended a civil code of marriage and succession for Hindus, giving
equal rights to women.
‒ After independence, the Uniform Civil Code (UCC) was included in the Directive Principles, not in the Fundamental Right
which is enforceable by the Court of Law due to the following reasons:
9 There was opposition from Muslim members in the Constituent Assembly (CA).
9 Dr B.R. Ambedkar’s opinion was that a UCC is desirable but for the moment should remain voluntary.
9 It can be implemented when the nation would be ready to accept it and the social acceptance to UCC is achieved.
9 Article 44 of the constitution (DPSP) says that the “State shall endeavour to provide for its citizens a uniform civil code
(UCC) throughout the territory of India.”
NEED OF UNIFORM CIVIL CODE
ˆ Ensuring equality: Currently, different communities are governed by different Personal laws like Hindu Marriage Act 1955.
Personal Law system may thus violate the principle of equality of the Constitution.
ˆ National integration: Separating religion from social relations and personal laws can be done through UCC, ensuring equality
and harmony in the society.
ˆ Gender Justice: UCC will promote gender justice by removing the inbuilt discriminatory provisions of personal laws.
ˆ Freedom of Choice: A religion neutral personal law would encourage protection of couples in case of inter-caste and inter-
religious marriages.

Supreme Court’s judgements on UCC


ˆ Shah Bano Case : The practice Triple Talaq (talaq-e-bidat) was declared as unconstitutional by SC and made it a criminal offense stating
that “A common civil code will help the cause of national integration by helping different loyalties to the conflicting ideologies”
ˆ Daniel Latifi Case: The Muslim Women’s Act (MWA) was challenged on the grounds that it infringed on Articles 14 and 15 of the
Constitution, as well as Article 21 of the Constitution. The apex court ruled that a divorced Muslim woman is entitled to maintenance
for the rest of her life or until she remarries.
ˆ Sarla Mudgal Vs Union of India: Hindu marriage solemnized under Hindu law can only be dissolved on specified grounds under the
Hindu Marriage Act 1955. A second marriage solemnized after converting to Islam would amount to offense offense under section
494 of the Indian Penal Code (IPC).
ˆ John Vallamattom case: The Supreme Court held “It is regrettable that Article 44 of the Constitution has not entered into force. A
common civil code will help the cause of national integration by removing contradictions based on ideologies”
ˆ Jordan Diengdeh case: The remarks on the UCC came on a petition questioning the applicability of The Hindu Marriage Act, 1955 in
respect of a couple belonging to the Meena community.

CHALLENGES AND ISSUES RELATED TO UCC


ˆ Existence of legal pluralism in civil laws: Indian laws do follow a uniform code in most civil matters. Diversity can be found
even under these secular civil laws.
ˆ Contradictory provisions in Constitution: Articles 371 (A) to (I) and the sixth schedule of the constitution of India provides
certain exceptions to the states of Assam, Nagaland, Mizoram, Andhra Pradesh and Goa with respect to family law.
ˆ Plurality and diversity: It has been argued that UCC threatens a pluralistic society like India, where people have confidence in
their respective religious beliefs or doctrines that have been presented by different religions.
ˆ Issue of Drafting the UCC: There is no guideline whether UCC must blend all the existing personal laws or develop new and
common law adhering to the constitutional mandate.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


41
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Concerns of Minorities: Most minorities feel a sense of insecurity, loss of identity and marginalization as they believe UCC
to be a majoritarian initiative.
WAY FORWARD
ˆ Centre would examine the report of the 21st Law Commission which undertook detailed research on the Uniform Civil Code.
ˆ An important step would be to constitute a Muslim Law Reforms Committee, Tribal and Indigenous Law Reform Committee,
Christian & Parsi Law Reforms Committees. Based on their recommendations, government could take the reforms process
ˆ Making UCC voluntary: If a person is free to choose whether they want to be governed by personal law, or by a non-religious
civil code, there is no reason why UCC and personal laws cannot co-exist.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


42
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS

INDIA AND PACIFIC ISLAND NATIONS


CONTEXT
Prime Minister Narendra Modi unveiled a 12-point development agenda for the Pacific Island Nations at the 3rd FIPIC (Forum for
India-Pacific Islands Cooperation) summit held at Port Moresby, the capital of Papua New Guinea.
THE 3RD FIPIC (FORUM FOR INDIA-PACIFIC ISLANDS COOPERATION) SUMMIT
ˆ The summit was co-chaired by
India along with Papua New
Guinea.
ˆ All the 14 Pacific Island
countries participated in the
summit.
ˆ At the Summit, PM Modi
asserted that the Pacific island
nations are “large ocean
countries and not small island
states”.
ˆ The 12-point development
agenda encompassed various areas of cooperation, including commerce, technology, healthcare, and climate change etc.
ˆ About FIPIC:
‒ FIPIC is a multinational grouping for cooperation between India and the Pacific Islands nations.
‒ The main objectives of FIPIC include enhancing political dialogue, fostering economic cooperation, promoting trade
and investment, and addressing common challenges such as climate change, sustainable development, and disaster
management.
‒ As part of the Act East Policy, India established the FIPIC and its inaugural gathering was convened by Prime Minister Modi
in Fiji in 2014.
‒ In 2015, the second meeting of the forum was held in Jaipur. In this gathering, numerous initiatives were announced to
promote the development and well-being of the people.
WHAT ARE PACIFIC ISLAND NATIONS (PINS)?
ˆ The Pacific island states comprise a group of 14 island nations in Pacific Ocean – Cook Islands, Fiji, Kiribati, Marshall Islands,
Micronesia, Nauru, Niue, Palau, Papua New Guinea, Samoa, Solomon Islands, Tonga, Tuvalu, and Vanuatu.
ˆ Based on several factors, including geographical proximity, cultural similarities, and linguistic affiliations, PINs are further
categorized into three major island groups namely Melanesia, Micronesia, and Polynesia.
ˆ These countries face common challenges such as climate change, sustainable development, limited resources, and
vulnerability to natural disasters.
WHY ARE THESE PACIFIC ISLAND NATIONS (PINS) IMPORTANT FOR INDIA?
ˆ India’s Act East Policy: Engagement with these 14 countries is part of India’s Act East Policy and India has been engaging with
these countries mainly through development assistance under South-South Cooperation.
ˆ Strategic Interests: The Pacific region holds strategic importance due to its location and maritime routes. PINs can serve as
strategic partners for India in areas such as maritime security, defense cooperation, and maintaining stability in the Indo-
Pacific region.
ˆ Economic opportunities: PINs provide economic opportunities for India via trade, investment, and resource exploration. They
possess minerals, fisheries, and energy reserves. Strengthening ties with PINs diversifies India’s trade, boosts energy security,
and promotes economic growth.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


43
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Counterbalancing influence: India’s increased engagement with PICs aims to promote a multipolar approach, and ensure a
rules-based order amidst the growing influence of major powers like China, Japan, the US, and Russia in the Pacific region.
ˆ Addressing common challenges: India’s engagement with PINs tackles common challenges like climate change, natural
disasters, sustainable development, and ocean conservation through collaboration, knowledge sharing, and joint initiatives,
promoting climate action and resilience-building.

CHALLENGES FOR INDIA IN THE REGION


ˆ Weak Diplomatic Representation: Indian diplomatic representation is weak and many of the PIF members are covered by
non-resident Indian missions which are not able to make frequent visits.
ˆ Countering China’s Influence: Countering China which has a stronghold in the region will be a herculean task. China’s extensive
presence in the region, including thousands of Chinese companies operating in various sectors, presents a challenge for India.
ˆ Financial Constraints: Meeting the requirements of multiple development projects in the region poses financial constraints
for India.
ˆ Influence of Australia: These countries are highly influenced by Australia due to its close proximity – for example, Australia
helping the development of natural gas of Papua New Guinea, etc.
EFFORTS OF INDIA TOWARDS THE PACIFIC ISLAND NATIONS (PINS)
ˆ Development assistance: India has been extending assistance to PINs in the form of capacity building, training, grants-in-aid,
loan assistance and community development projects.
‒ Centres of Information Technology Labs and Centres for Excellence in IT (CEITs) have been established in different
countries in PINs.
‒ India is supporting infrastructure development, and the focus is especially on education, culture, health, colleges, IT
infrastructure, and setting up of digital libraries, among others.
‒ Fiji and PNG were supplied with indelible ink for use in their general elections.
ˆ Climate resilience: Due to the effects of rising sea levels these countries are vulnerable to climate change. And India has
once again been at the forefront in extending initiatives including International Solar Alliance (ISA) and Coalition for Disaster
Resilient Infrastructure (CDRI).

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


44
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ HDAR: From time-to-time India has been providing Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster Relief (HADR) and has also provided
assistance during the pandemic when it supplied Covid-19 Vaccines and Medical supplies.
ˆ Sustainable development and women empowerment: Challenges of climate change threaten PICs and to deal with this,
India has a project for providing solar electrification for 2,800 houses in 14 countries and has also undertaken 70 women solar
engineers — Solar Mamas.
‒ These 70 women have been trained and the process of electrification is underway. This will not only address climate
change and achieve the goals of sustainable development; it will also help to provide livelihoods to women.
ˆ In 2017 India-UN Development Partnership Fund was created, aimed to support the demand-driven sustainable development
projects not only in developing countries, LDCs and on small island developing states. In fact, PINs have been beneficiaries
of this fund.
ˆ Pacific Islands Forum: India has been a dialogue partner to the Pacific Islands Forum.
‒ The Pacific Islands Forum (PIF), established in 1971, is a regional intergovernmental organization that aims to promote
cooperation and dialogue among Pacific Island countries.

INDIA- ASEAN RELATIONS


CONTEXT
In a step to further expand India-ASEAN (Association of South East Asian Nations) military cooperation, the maiden ASEAN-India
Maritime Exercise (AIME) is set to begin shortly.
MORE ON THE NEWS
ˆ The Republic of Singapore Navy (RSN) and the Indian Navy (IN) are co-hosting the ASEAN-India Maritime Exercise (AIME).
ˆ AIME-2023 will provide an opportunity for Indian Navy and ASEAN navies to work together closely and conduct seamless
operations in the maritime domain.
ˆ The ‘Harbour Phase’ of the exercise is will be held at Changi Naval Base and ‘Sea Phase’ will be held in the South China Sea.
ABOUT ASSOCIATION OF SOUTHEAST ASIAN NATIONS (ASEAN)
ˆ It was founded in 1967 by the five Southeast Asian nations of Indonesia, Malaysia, Philippines, Singapore and Thailand.
ˆ It is a regional grouping that aims to promote economic and security cooperation among its ten members.
ˆ Members: Brunei, Cambodia, Indonesia, Laos, Malaysia, Myanmar, the Philippines, Singapore, Thailand, and Vietnam.
ˆ ASEAN is headed by a chair—a position that rotates annually among member states—and is assisted by a secretariat based
in Jakarta, Indonesia.
ˆ If ASEAN were a country, it would be the seventh-largest economy in the world, with a combined GDP of $2.6 trillion in
2014.
‒ By 2050 its projected to rank as the fourth-largest economy.
ˆ Home to more than 622 million people, the region has a larger population than the European Union or North America.
‒ It also has the third-largest labour force in the world, behind China and India.
ˆ Significance: ASEAN has played a central role in Asian economic integration, joining negotiations to form the world’s largest
free trade agreement and signing six free trade deals with other regional economies.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


45
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

SIGNIFICANCE OF ASEAN FOR INDIA


The significance of ASEAN for India is multi-faceted and encompasses political, economic, strategic, and cultural aspects. The
following are some of the key reasons why ASEAN is important for India:
ˆ ASEAN’s centrality in India’s foreign policy: ASEAN is a key pillar of India’s Act East Policy and Indo-Pacific Vision. A cohesive,
responsive, and prosperous ASEAN is crucial for India’s regional ambitions.
ˆ Connectivity and development of Northeast: India has been prioritizing the ASEAN-India connectivity project, which aims to
improve connectivity and infrastructure in the Northeast region. This can lead to progress and development in the region.
ˆ Maritime engagement: India and ASEAN aim to tackle traditional and non-traditional security threats in the region, such as
piracy and drug trafficking. It also helps India bypass choke points such as the Malacca Strait in the Indian Ocean Region (IOR).
ˆ Security: ASEAN and India are working towards establishing a rules-based security architecture in the region, which contrasts
China’s aggressive policies. They also collaborate to counter terrorism, violent extremism, and transnational crimes.
ˆ Economic: India is one of ASEAN’s top trading and investment partners. ASEAN countries offer a conducive environment for
Indian businesses to invest and trade, and the region presents a lucrative market opportunity for Indian companies.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


46
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Supply chain integration post-COVID-19 pandemic: ASEAN and India are responding to the new supply chains emerging in the
region and are working towards enhanced trade facilitation.
ˆ Cultural connections: India shares deep
cultural and historical connections
with ASEAN countries. The spread of
Hinduism and Buddhism to Southeast
Asia from India and the influence of
Indian languages on the region’s scripts
are some examples of the cultural
connection between the two regions.
INDIA’S RELATIONSHIP WITH ASEAN
OVER THE YEARS
ˆ Political: India’s political relationship
with ASEAN has been cordial and
cooperative.
‒ The two sides share a similar outlook
on several regional and global issues,
including the need for a rules-based
international order, respect for
territorial integrity and sovereignty,
and the importance of economic
growth and development.
‒ India has been actively engaged
with ASEAN in various regional
forums and initiatives, such as the
ASEAN Regional Forum (ARF),
ASEAN Defence Ministers’ Meeting +
(ADMM+), and the East Asia Summit
(EAS).
‒ In 2012, India and ASEAN elevated
their relationship to a Strategic
Partnership, which marked a
significant milestone in their
bilateral ties.
‒ In recent years, they share interests
in cooperation in sectors, such as
trade and investment, energy, infrastructure, and people-to-people contacts.
‒ India’s Act East Policy, which was formally enunciated in 2014, is a key pillar of its foreign policy and is focused on expanding
its engagement with ASEAN and other countries in the region.
ˆ Economic: ASEAN is one of India’s largest trading partners.
‒ Investment flows are also substantial both ways, with ASEAN accounting for a significant percentage of investment flows
into India since 2000.
‒ The ASEAN-India Agreements on Trade in Service and Investments entered into force in 2015.
‒ India has a Comprehensive Economic Cooperation Agreement (CECA) with various countries of the ASEAN region which
has resulted in concessional trade and a rise in investments.
‒ The ASEAN India-Business Council (AIBC) was set up in March 2003 in Kuala Lumpur as a forum to bring key private sector
players from India and the ASEAN countries on a single platform for business networking and sharing of ideas.
ˆ Security and Defence: Joint Naval and Military exercises are conducted between India and most ASEAN countries.
‒ The maiden Asean-India Maritime Exercise is held this year (2023).

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


47
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Watershed’ Military Exercise was held in 2016.


‒ Also, partnership between ASEAN and India helps in countering Terrorism, Violent Extremism and Transnational Crimes,
including through implementation of ASEAN Plan of Action in Combating Transnational Crime (2016-2025).
ˆ Tourism and people to people contact - India is the first Dialogue Partner to sign an MoU on Strengthening Tourism Cooperation
with ASEAN.
DIVERGENCE OF INDIA ASEAN RELATIONS
ˆ Implementation of projects: One of the major challenges is the lack of time-bound implementation of projects, such as
the India-Myanmar-Thailand trilateral highway and Kaladan multimodal project, which would enhance connectivity between
India and the ASEAN region.
ˆ Trade and economic ties: Despite efforts to strengthen economic ties, India’s trade and economic ties with ASEAN are much
below their potential. China remains the largest trading partner of the regional grouping, followed by the European Union
and the United States.
ˆ Free mobility of labour: The free mobility of labour within the ASEAN Economic Community region might hamper India’s
prospects in terms of mobility of skilled workers, which has just been implemented with the ASEAN-India Services agreement.
ˆ Quadrilateral Security Initiative: ASEAN has not been very favourable to the rise of QUAD as a significant security institution
in the region. It is neither willing to be entangled in the possible power transition taking place in the Indo Pacific.
ˆ Low FDI: India’s FDI in ASEAN is also low in comparison to China, with China’s FDI to ASEAN standing at a much higher figure.
ˆ Slow pace of implementation: The slow pace of implementation and lack of willingness to take risks has deterred India’s
public sector enterprises and private companies from making substantive investments in the Southeast Asian region.
ˆ Territorial disputes: ASEAN member states are enmeshed in territorial disputes with interested powers for a long time, which
creates a challenge for maintaining peaceful relations.
ˆ Indo-Pacific rivalry: The rivalry between major powers in the Indo-Pacific region, such as China and the United States,
threatens the underlying stability on which rested the regional growth and prosperity.
ˆ Wobbling geopolitics: The geopolitical tension in the Indo-Pacific is producing geoeconomics consequences where issues
of trade and technology cooperation as well as supply chain resilience are at peak. This is happening at a time when ASEAN
remains a divided organization internally on how to manage these challenges.

INDIA-BANGLADESH RELATIONS
CONTEXT
The Indian Ministry of Railways handed over 20 broad- gauge locomotives to Bangladesh recently.
MORE ON NEWS
ˆ The handing over of locomotives to Bangladesh is to strengthen bilateral relations between the two countries.
ˆ The locomotives have been modified to suit the requirements of Bangladesh Railway and will help handle the increasing
volume of passenger and freight train operations in Bangladesh.
ˆ Additionally, India has offered Bangladesh the use of the IT system deployed by the PM-GATI SHAKTI scheme, which provides
detailed information based on satellite imagery to streamline planning and improve connectivity.
ˆ The Indian Railways is playing a vital role in improving rail connectivity and trade between India and Bangladesh, with close to
100 cargo trains being exchanged between the two countries each month.
INDIA-BANGLADESH RELATIONS
Historical Ties
ˆ India and Bangladesh share a 4,096.7 km-long border, making it the longest land boundary that India shares with any of its
neighboring countries.
ˆ The relationship between India and Bangladesh is not just that of neighbours, but it is deeply rooted in shared history,
heritage, culture, language, and a passion for music, literature, and arts.
ˆ India was the first country to recognize Bangladesh as an independent state and established diplomatic relations immediately
after its independence in 1971.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


48
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Both countries are members of regional organizations like SAARC, BIMSTEC, IORA, and the Commonwealth.

AREAS OF COOPERATION
ˆ Political: India’s support in terms of humanitarian aid, moral support, diplomatic efforts, and military assistance played a
crucial role in the liberation of Bangladesh. Sheikh Mujeeb ur Rehman, popularly known as Bang Bandhu, openly recognized
that maintaining a friendship with India is a fundamental aspect of Bangladesh’s foreign policy.
ˆ Security & Border Management: Coordinated Border Management plan, signed in 2011, which aims to synergize the efforts
of both countries’ border guarding forces in effectively controlling cross-border illegal activities and crimes.
‒ The India-Bangladesh Land Boundary Agreement (LBA) came into effect in June 2015.
‒ This agreement facilitated the exchange of enclaves between India and Bangladesh and the signing of strip maps.
‒ It is expected to enhance border management and address issues related to trafficking, illegal movements, and more.
‒ The settlement of the maritime boundary arbitration between India and Bangladesh, based on the UNCLOS award in 2014,
has opened avenues for economic development in the Bay of Bengal region, benefiting both countries.
‒ India and Bangladesh have established an annual Coordinated Patrol (CORPAT) as a joint initiative between their navies.
ˆ River Water Management: India and Bangladesh have a shared responsibility for managing the waters of 54 rivers, with
Bangladesh being the lower riparian country.
‒ Being a lower riparian country, Bangladesh faces potential risks and impacts from the rivers originating in India.
‒ However, India provides Bangladesh with seasonal water flow and rainfall data to assist in flood forecasting.
‒ To facilitate effective cooperation and maximize the benefits from the common river systems, a bilateral Joint Rivers
Commission (JRC) has been operational since 1972.
‒ The Ganges Waters Treaty, signed in 1996, has also been successful in facilitating the sharing of water from the River
Ganges during the lean season.
ˆ Bilateral Trade: The volume of bilateral trade stood at approximately $9.3 billion (2017-18), which is more than three times
the value recorded a decade ago ($2.67 billion).
‒ Both countries are actively working on strengthening economic cooperation, including joint investments and collaboration
under the ‘Blue Economy’ program, which focuses on the exploration of hydrocarbons, marine resources, deep-sea
fishing, marine ecology preservation, and disaster management among littoral states.
‒ India’s exports to Bangladesh in 2017-18 amounted to around $8.4 billion, while imports from Bangladesh during the
same period were around $900 million.
‒ Bangladesh has received significant duty concessions under agreements like SAFTA, SAPTA, and APTA.
‒ Since 2011, India has provided duty-free, quota-free access to Bangladesh (and other SAARC LDCs) on all tariff lines,
except for sensitive items such as tobacco and alcohol, under SAFTA.
‒ Additionally, four Border Haats, two each in Tripura and Meghalaya, have been established to benefit communities along
the border.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


49
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Investments and Indian Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in Bangladesh have shown significant progress.
ˆ Energy Sector Cooperation:
‒ Power transmission between the two countries takes place through interconnections like the Berhampore-Bheramara
interconnection and Suraj Mani Nagar-Comilla interconnection.
‒ India, Russia, and Bangladesh signed an agreement for the construction of the Rooppur atomic plant in Bangladesh.
‒ The Maitree thermal power plant, with a capacity of 1320 MW, is a joint venture between the National Thermal Power
Corporation (NTPC) of India and the Bangladesh Power Development Board (BPDB).
9 It is a coal-fired power plant being developed in Rampal.
‒ Several Indian public sector units, including the Indian Oil Corporation, Numaligarh Refinery Limited, Gas Authority of
India Limited, and Petronet LNG Ltd, are collaborating with their Bangladeshi counterparts in the oil and gas sector of
Bangladesh.
‒ In 2018, the construction of the India-Bangladesh Friendship Pipeline Project was inaugurated.
9 This pipeline, spanning 130 km, connects Siliguri in West Bengal, India, to Parbatipur in the Dinajpur district of
Bangladesh.
ˆ Connectivity:
‒ For road transport, there are 36 functional Land Customs Stations (LCSs) and 2 Integrated Check Posts (ICPs) along the
border, enabling the operationalization of goods transportation.
‒ Since 1972, the Protocol on Inland Water Trade and Transit (PIWTT) has facilitated the movement of goods through
barges/vessels on eight specific routes across the river systems of Bangladesh.
‒ Connectivity through Coastal Waterways, facilitated by the Coastal Shipping Agreement, has enabled direct sea movement
of containerized, bulk, and dry cargo between the two countries.
‒ The passenger train service ‘Maitree Express’ between Kolkata and Dhaka now operates four days a week and has been
converted into a fully air-conditioned (AC) train service.
‒ The Bangladesh, Bhutan, India, and Nepal (BBIN) Motor Vehicles Agreement (MVA) aims to enhance road connectivity.
ˆ Cultural Exchange:
‒ The High Commission of India has been publishing the Bengali literary monthly magazine ‘Bharat Bichitra’ in both print
and electronic editions for the past 43 years.
‒ This magazine is highly regarded in Bangladesh and enjoys a large readership across different sections of society.
‒ The Indira Gandhi Cultural Centre conducts regular training courses in various disciplines such as Yoga, Hindi language,
Hindustani Classical Music, Manipuri Dance, Kathak, and Painting. These courses are well-received by Bangladeshi students
and have gained popularity.
CHALLENGES IN INDIA-BANGLADESH TIES
The major challenges between India and Bangladesh relationship include:
ˆ Teesta Water Issue: The sharing of Teesta river waters has been a contentious issue between the two countries. Bangladesh
seeks an equitable distribution of water, while West Bengal’s concerns about the impact on its own water supply have hindered
the signing of a treaty.
ˆ China’s Influence: India is concerned about China’s increasing influence in Bangladesh, particularly through infrastructure
projects such as the development of ports. India views Bangladesh’s proximity to China’s “One Belt, One Road” initiative as a
potential threat to its own regional influence.
ˆ Illegal Migration and Insurgency: The porous border between the two countries has led to a significant influx of illegal
migrants, posing socio-economic and security challenges for India. The presence of insurgent groups, such as the Jamaat-ul
Mujahideen Bangladesh (JMB), also raises concerns about terrorism.
ˆ Rohingya Crisis: India’s handling of the Rohingya refugee crisis has been a point of contention. Bangladesh expected India
to play a more proactive role in resolving the crisis, but India’s approach and stance have been disappointing to Bangladesh.
ˆ Drug Smuggling and Trafficking: Cross-border drug smuggling and human trafficking are significant challenges that require
joint efforts to combat. The illegal trade poses risks to both countries’ security and social fabric.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


50
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Border Disputes: Unresolved border issues, such as the non-demarcation of a land border along Comilla-Tripura, continue
to strain the bilateral relationship. Concerns over the impact on local communities have hindered progress in resolving these
disputes.
ˆ Public Discontentment: There are various issues that have led to public discontentment in Bangladesh, including market
access for Indian energy companies, border restrictions, unresolved agreements like the Teesta treaty, and limited market
access for Bangladeshi companies and TV channels.

INDIA-MALDIVES RELATIONS
CONTEXT
India’s Defence Minister and his Maldivian counterpart, laid the foundation stone for the Maldives National Defence Forces Coast
Guard ‘Ekatha Harbour’.
MORE ON THE NEWS
ˆ This is the first visit of an Indian Defence Minister to the island nation in 11 years.
ˆ The development of the Coast Guard Harbour and repair facility at Sifavaru is one of the biggest grant-in-aid projects of India.
ˆ Both Ministers reaffirmed the importance of maintaining peace, stability and security in the region and recognised the need
to work together to address common security challenges.
ˆ They underscored the importance of respecting international law and rules-based international order and expressed their
commitment to upholding these principles and to explore additional avenues for cooperation, including in the areas of
defence trade, capacity building and joint exercises.
INDIA- MALDIVES RELATIONS
Maldives
ˆ Maldives, situated in the Indian Ocean, is an archipelago of more
than 1,000 distinct islands.
ˆ It is located about 300 miles from the southern coast of India and
450 miles southwest of Sri Lanka.
ˆ The majority of the Maldivian population adheres to Sunni Islam.
ˆ However, being a low-lying nation, most of its landmasses are
merely a meter above the sea level, rendering it highly susceptible
to the adverse impacts of climate change and rising sea levels.

ˆ India and Maldives have long-standing friendly and close ties, sharing ethnic, linguistic, cultural, religious, and commercial
connections that date back to ancient times.
ˆ India was one of the first countries to establish diplomatic relations with Maldives after its independence in 1965, with its
mission in Male being set up in 1972.
ˆ Since then, the two countries have strengthened their bilateral relations through regular contacts at all levels.
ˆ Maldives established a full-fledged High Commission in New Delhi in 2004, which was one of only four diplomatic missions
at that time.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


51
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Guided by the principles of South-South cooperation and solidarity, India and Maldives have collaborated bilaterally with a
focus on developing soft power leverage among their neighbours.
ˆ Given its strategic location in the Indian Ocean, Maldives holds significant importance for India as part of its “Neighborhood
First” policy.
AREAS OF COOPERATION
ˆ Political:
‒ The political area of cooperation between India and Maldives includes regular high-level visits by leaders of both
countries, support for each other in multilateral fora such as the UN, the Commonwealth, the NAM, and the SAARC, and
discussions on security and law enforcement cooperation.
‒ Both countries have also reaffirmed their commitment to an India-first policy, and India has provided developmental
assistance to Maldives.
‒ However, after the deterioration of India’s relations with Maldives due to China’s cultivation of ties with former Maldives
President Abdulla Yameen, the situation improved after the election of Ibrahim Mohamed Solih as the new president of
Maldives in 2018.
‒ The most recent visit of Maldives President to India in August 2022 aimed to enhance geopolitical, security, and economic
ties between the two countries, especially in light of the economic and political turmoil faced by their common neighbour,
Sri Lanka.
ˆ Economic:
‒ India and Maldives have a bilateral trade agreement in place since 1981, which allows for the export of essential
commodities.
‒ Bilateral trade between India and Maldives has been steadily growing, crossing the $300 million mark for the first time
in 2021 and registering a 31% growth over the previous year, despite pandemic-related challenges.
‒ India is now Maldives’ 2nd largest trading partner, up from the 4th position in 2018.
‒ Indian exports to the Maldives include a variety of products such as agriculture and poultry produce, sugar, fruits,
vegetables, spices, rice, wheat flour, textiles, drugs and medicines, engineering and industrial products, sand and
aggregate, cement, etc.
‒ In return, India provides essential food items such as rice, wheat flour, sugar, dal, onion, potato, and eggs, as well as
construction materials such as sand and stone aggregates to the Maldives on favourable terms.
‒ India has also expressed its interest in cooperating with the Maldives in the petroleum and natural gas sectors, particularly
in oil exploration, as well as in tourism and education.
ˆ Defence and Security: India and Maldives have a close defence and security relationship that includes a range of activities
such as joint combat exercises, maritime surveillance, and supply of military equipment to Maldives.
‒ The partnership is important for maintaining security in the Indian Ocean region (IOR) and countering common threats
such as radicalism, terrorism, drug trafficking, and financing of terrorism.
‒ India and Maldives have been conducting joint military training exercises and Coast Guard training exercises since 1991.
‒ India has also provided security assistance to Maldives in the past, such as when the Indian Army’s ‘Operation Cactus’
foiled a coup in Maldives in 1988, and when India dispatched relief supplies and aid after the tsunami of December 26,
2004, and after a fire destroyed the generator of Maldives’ biggest water treatment plant in 2014.
‒ India has also pledged to provide vehicles, naval boats, and training to Maldives’ security forces and to cooperate in
building police facilities in Maldives.
‒ India has also encouraged Maldives to embrace the Quad’s Pacific strategy, which involves India, the US, Japan, and
Australia.
ˆ Developmental Assistance:
‒ India has been providing development assistance to Maldives in various areas such as health, education, transport, waste
management, natural disaster management, and skill and capacity building.
‒ Both countries have signed a Framework Agreement on Cooperation for Development in 2011.
‒ India has provided budgetary support of Rs. 100 million to Maldives after the tsunami in 2004.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


52
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ The Indian government has extended a $100 million Standby Credit Facility to Maldives to stabilize its fiscal position.
‒ India has undertaken various infrastructure development projects in Maldives, including the construction of a Composite
Training Centre for Maldives National Defence Force, housing units, and a solar energy project.
‒ India has also provided financial assistance, such as a currency swap facility of US$150mn in 2020, and is the largest
tourist source market for Maldives.
‒ Other India-assisted projects in the region include water and sewerage projects, reclamation projects, port development,
airport redevelopment etc.

Greater Male Connectivity Project


ˆ Afcons, an Indian company, has signed a contract
for the largest-ever infrastructure project in
Maldives-Greater Male Connectivity Project
(GMCP).
ˆ The Project will consist of a 6.74 km-long
bridge and causeway link between Male and
nearby islands of Villingli, Gulhifalhu and
Thilafushi. It will use renewable energy.
ˆ The project is funded by a grant of USD 100
million and a Line of Credit (LOC) of USD 400
million from India.
ˆ It is not only the biggest project India undertakes
in the Maldives but also the biggest infrastructure
project in the Maldives.
Significance:
ˆ It is considered as the economic lifeline for the
Maldives and will provide a major boost to
connectivity between the four islands accounting
for about half of the Maldivian population.
ˆ It will enhance Maldivian transport and economic activities.

ˆ Culture: The Indian community in Maldives is the second largest expatriate community in the country, comprising
approximately 22,000 workers and professionals such as doctors, teachers, accountants, engineers, and technicians.
‒ Improved air connectivity and the close proximity between the two nations have led to a significant increase in the
number of Indians visiting Maldives for tourism and business.
‒ India is a popular destination for Maldivians seeking education, medical treatment, recreation, and business opportunities.
‒ Indian experts successfully restored three historical mosques in Maldives - the Friday Mosque and Dharumavantha
Rasgefaanu Mosque in Male’ and the Fenfushi Mosque in South Ari Atoll.
‒ To promote Indian culture and traditions, the India Cultural Center (ICC) was established in Male in 2011. The center
conducts regular courses in yoga, classical music, and dance.
SIGNIFICANCE OF MALDIVES FOR INDIA
ˆ Geostrategic: Maldives is an important member of India’s Neighbourhood First Policy and SAGAR (Security and Growth for All
in the Region) vision.
ˆ Geopolitical: China’s Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), involving the Maldives has widened the Chinese sphere of influence that
has potential to adversely affect India’s interests.
ˆ Geoeconomics: 50% of India’s external trade and 80% of our energy imports transit through the Sea lanes of communication
(SLOCs) in the vicinity of the Maldives.
ˆ Net Security Provider: Maldives is positioned like a “toll gate” between the western and Eastern Indian Ocean.
ˆ Regional Cooperation: Both Nations are engaged through platforms like SAARC, SASEC, IORA and IONs.
CHALLENGES IN INDIA MALDIVES RELATIONS
The challenges in India-Maldives relations can be categorized into various areas:

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


53
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Political Instability: The ongoing political instability in the Maldives, including the arrest of opposition leaders, declaration of
emergency, and lack of genuine political dialogue, has posed a significant challenge for India’s neighbourhood policy.
ˆ Relation with China: China’s increasing strategic presence in the Maldives, including its interest in developing infrastructure,
acquiring land, and signing a free trade agreement, has raised concerns for India’s security and strategic interests.
ˆ Radicalization and Terrorism: The rise of Islamist radicalism in the Maldives, coupled with the possibility of terrorist groups
using remote islands as launch pads for attacks against India, has raised security concerns.
ˆ Indian Ocean Region: Maldives’ strategic location along major sea lanes in the Indian Ocean and its vulnerability to piracy and
sudden environmental changes have become key concerns for India.
ˆ Climate Change: Maldives’ vulnerability to climate change, including rising sea levels and natural disasters, has implications
for India’s security and development interests.
ˆ Development: Unequal development among atolls and lack of funds to develop connectivity and infrastructure pose challenges
for initiating various development projects in the region.
ˆ GMR Issue: The termination of the agreement with GMR for the modernization of the Ibrahim Nasir International Airport,
followed by arbitration and the subsequent award of the project to a Chinese company, has strained India-Maldives relations.

WEST ASIAN QUAD


CONTEXT
The Prince of Saudi, Mohammad Bin Salman recently hosted a special meeting of the National Security Advisers (NSAs) of India,
the U.S. and the UAE, in Jeddah.
MORE ON THE NEWS
The Quad
ˆ The Quadrilateral Security Dialogue, the Quad began as an informal partnership after the 2004 Indian Ocean tsunami, when India,
Australia, the US and Japan joined together to provide humanitarian and disaster assistance to the affected region.
ˆ The grouping was formalized by former Japanese Prime Minister Shinzo Abe in 2007. However, it became dormant after Australia’s
concerns.
ˆ The grouping was revived in 2017 amidst China’s growing influence in the region. The Quad could act as a counterweight to China’s
assertive actions.
ˆ Objectives/goals:
‒ The major aim is to deepen economic, diplomatic and military ties among the four countries.
‒ The grouping strives to establish a region that is free, open, inclusive, healthy, anchored by democratic values, and unconstrained
by coercion.
‒ Even though China has termed the group as ‘Asian NATO’, there is no mutual-defence pact in effect.
ˆ There are plans to expand the group into Quad+ with participation of South Korea, New Zealand and Vietnam.

ˆ The term “West Asian Quad” is a reference to the Quadrilateral Security Dialogue, commonly known as the Quad- which is a
strategic forum consisting of four countries: the United States, Japan, India, and Australia.
ˆ The meeting was focused on considering regional initiatives on infrastructure, and is unlike anything seen in the region in
recent years.
ˆ The leaders discussed means to strengthen relations and ties between their countries in a way that enhances growth and
stability in the region through interconnectedness with India and the world.
ˆ The meeting is significant as it follows Indian NSA’s recent visit to Iran, which recently agreed to restart ties in a meeting
brokered by Beijing.
KEY OBJECTIVES OF THE MEETING
ˆ The major objective of the meeting is to advance the shared vision of a more secure and prosperous Middle East region
interconnected with India and the world.
ˆ It aimed to discuss new areas of cooperation between India, the Gulf, and the United States, fueled in part by the comprehensive
economic partnership signed last year between India and the UAE.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


54
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ It is also seen as a move to counter China’s Belt and Road Initiative and other inroads in the region.
ˆ One of the main infrastructure projects is a plan to connect Gulf countries via a railway network and connect to India via
shipping lanes from “two ports” in the region.
INDIA WEST ASIA RELATIONS
India’s Look West Policy
ˆ India’s “Look West” policy refers to the country’s foreign policy approach towards West Asia, also known as the Greater
Middle East region.
ˆ The policy has evolved over time, from a multi-directional approach during the Cold War to a more pragmatic, national
interest-oriented approach post-1991.
ˆ India has sought to build strong economic and diplomatic ties with West Asian countries, including Saudi Arabia, Iran, and
Israel, while also maintaining traditional relationships with these countries.
ˆ India has avoided taking sides (stuck to the principal of non-Alignment) in regional conflicts and has focused on promoting
peace and stability through diplomatic initiatives.
ˆ As its strategic interests in the region grow, India is increasingly engaging with West Asia on multiple fronts, including energy,
trade, and security.
India’s “Look West” Policy Has Several Advantages
ˆ Access to energy resources: The West Asian region is home to some of the world’s largest oil and gas reserves, and India’s
closer engagement with these countries allows it to secure its energy needs and diversify its energy sources.
ˆ Economic opportunities: India’s engagement with West Asian countries provides significant economic opportunities, including
trade and investment, and access to markets for Indian goods and services.
ˆ Regional stability: By promoting regional economic cooperation and stability, India’s Look West policy aims to reduce tensions
and conflicts in the region, which could have negative spillover effects on India.
ˆ Strategic partnerships: India’s closer engagement with West Asian countries has led to the development of strategic
partnerships, which can help India advance its interests in the region and beyond.
ˆ Improved connectivity: India’s Look West policy also aims to improve connectivity between India and the West Asian region,
including through the development of transportation and communication infrastructure, which can facilitate greater people-
to-people contact and cultural exchanges.

West Asia
ˆ West Asia serves as a land bridge
connecting three continents: Asia,
Africa, and Europe, making it an
important gateway between Asia and
Africa, and a back-door to Europe.
ˆ It is surrounded by three seas: the
Mediterranean, Red, and Arabian Sea,
and is a hub for international trade with
various regions.
ˆ West Asia is home to two significant
waterways, the straits of Bosphorus and
Dardanelles.
ˆ In the past, Arabs acted as a bridge
between India and the West, facilitating
the exchange of knowledge, such as
numerals, as well as the trade of spices,
foodstuffs, jewelry, textiles, muslin,
and other goods from India to the Arab
region.
ˆ Meanwhile, pearls and dates were exported from the Gulf region.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


55
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

SIGNIFICANCE OF WEST ASIA FOR INDIA


West Asia holds significant importance for India due to several factors:
ˆ Energy Security: The region supplies nearly 60% of India’s total crude oil requirement, making it crucial for India’s energy
security. Saudi Arabia is India’s top supplier of crude oil, followed by other Gulf countries. The region also accounts for a major
fraction of India’s LNG import.
ˆ Trade and Investment: The Gulf remains a significant trading partner for India, with trade figures consistently going up,
especially with countries like the UAE, Saudi Arabia, and Iran. Attracting foreign direct investment from the cash-rich Gulf
region is also a priority for India.
ˆ Palestine Issue: India has maintained its stand on the “two-state” solution between Israel and Palestine, and has reiterated its
support for all efforts for a resolution, including on the contentious issue of Jerusalem, which Israel has claimed in its entirety
since 1967.
ˆ Forging Strategic Ties: The support of Gulf countries is important for India’s bid for a Permanent Seat at the United Nations
Security Council. India and UAE have elevated their relationship to a Strategic Partnership.
ˆ Protecting Interests of Diaspora: Protecting the interests of the 9 million strong Indian diaspora in the Gulf is an important
element of India’s policy priorities in the region. The Indian diaspora in the Gulf is a major source of remittances.
ˆ Military Cooperation: The growing threats of Islamic fundamentalism and terrorism have become concerns for both India and
the Gulf countries. India has been deepening defence cooperation with countries like the United Arab Emirates and Oman,
conducting regular bilateral exercises between their forces.
ˆ Fighting Piracy: Piracy activities off the Gulf of Aden in the Indian Ocean have affected both India and the Gulf countries.
Cooperation with the Gulf countries in fighting piracy would strengthen India’s presence in the strategic waters of the Indian
Ocean.
ˆ Strengthening Soft Power: In West Asia, India’s most distinct soft power asset is the diaspora and its role in buttressing a
positive image of the country. India’s policy of non-interference and neutrality are other dimensions of soft power.
CHALLENGES
ˆ Political Instability: The security situation in West Asia has been continuously deteriorating ever since the onset of the Arab
Spring in December 2010.
‒ The internal security situation in Syria, Iraq, and Yemen has gone from bad to worse. The regional powers continue to
fight proxy wars on sectarian lines, pumping huge amounts of money and weapons to bolster their favoured groups.
‒ The involvement of extra-regional players such as the USA and Russia in the internal conflicts in West Asia (Syria) has
further aggravated the situation.
ˆ Terrorism: Terrorism has emerged as the biggest security threat in the region. The rise of the Islamic State and other terror
groups has created a threat to the Indian diaspora residing in West Asia.
‒ Also, the radicalization of Indian youth and their joining the Islamic State has been another major problem.
ˆ Saudi–Iran–Israel rivalry: The rivalry has been destabilizing West Asia and influencing West Asian geopolitics.
‒ The recent withdrawal of the US from JCPOA can be seen through the prism of this rivalry. It will be a difficult task for India
to continue to balance its relations with all three countries without antagonizing any of them.
ˆ India–Israel close ties: India’s deepening defence and strategic relations with Israel have not gone down well with Iran, which
has started to play its China and Pakistan card to extract more from India.
ˆ China factor: China has made rapid inroads in the Gulf by having acquired equity stakes in the region’s upstream oil and gas
sector and having successfully penetrated Arab markets.
‒ China is continuously making inroads to West Asia through the OBOR initiative.
‒ India’s incapacity to manage its own periphery, South Asia, has made Gulf Arabs more inclined to seek China as a better
security partner, rather than India.
ˆ Pakistan factor: India’s “trust deficit” with Pakistan has incapacitated India from advancing its commercial interests in West
Asia, including the bringing to fruition of the Iran-India-Pakistan (IPI) and Turkmenistan-Afghanistan-Pakistan-India (TAPI) gas
pipeline projects.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


56
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Arab slowdown & Nationalization: The decline of oil and gas prices, along with the rising cost of “war conditions,” has led to
the slowing of Arab Gulf economies, resulting in salary cuts, layoffs, contracting employment opportunities, and nationalization
of workforces at the cost of the Indian expatriate community.
ˆ US Sanctions on Iran: The US withdrawal from the Iran nuclear deal and its threatened imposition of economic sanctions on
Iran may weaken the dialogue mechanisms, embolden conservatives, and threaten regional stability even more. India also has
significant oil trade with Iran and stakes in connectivity through Chabahar port and other projects.

QUAD
CONTEXT
Australian Prime Minister Anthony Albanese has ruled out a Quad summit taking place in Sydney without the American President
Joe Biden, stating that the four leaders will talk at the Group of Seven meeting this weekend in Japan.
ABOUT QUAD
ˆ The Quadrilateral Security Dialogue, commonly known as the Quad, is an informal association comprising India, the United
States, Australia, and Japan.
ˆ It originated in 2007 when the four countries held their first meeting on the sidelines of the Association of Southeast Asian
Nations (ASEAN).
EVOLUTION OF QUAD
ˆ The Quad’s establishment can be traced back to the cooperation between these countries during Exercise Malabar and the
joint relief operations conducted after the 2004 Indian Ocean tsunami.
ˆ Initially it was formed to address concerns over China’s growing economic and military power.
ˆ India was cautious about China’s response, particularly regarding its pursuit of a Nuclear Suppliers’ Group waiver.
ˆ Additionally, there were doubts about the effectiveness of a quadrilateral arrangement, as India already had trilateral
partnerships with Japan and the U.S., as well as Australia and Japan.
ˆ However, in 2017, faced with renewed challenges posed by China’s rise, the four countries revived the Quad, leading to the
formation of “Quad 2.0.” The reinvigorated Quad is the result of substantial groundwork undertaken between 2017 and 2021.
OBJECTIVES
The aim of the Quadrilateral Security Dialogue (Quad) is to promote cooperation and coordination among its member countries—
United States, Japan, Australia, and India—on various strategic and security-related issues in the Indo-Pacific region. The Quad’s
objectives include:
ˆ Ensuring a Free and Open Indo-Pacific: The Quad seeks to maintain a rules-based international order, freedom of navigation,
and respect for international law in the Indo-Pacific region. It aims to promote the principles of openness, inclusivity,
transparency, and respect for sovereignty.
ˆ Enhancing Regional Security: The Quad aims to strengthen regional security by addressing common challenges such as
maritime security, counterterrorism, non-proliferation, and cybersecurity threats. It seeks to improve coordination among
member countries’ defence and security establishments.
ˆ Promoting Economic Cooperation: The Quad encourages economic development and connectivity in the Indo-Pacific region.
It aims to promote infrastructure development, trade, investment, and technological collaboration to foster economic growth
and prosperity.
ˆ Humanitarian and Disaster Response: The Quad aims to enhance cooperation in responding to natural disasters, humanitarian
crises, and emergency situations. Member countries work together to provide disaster relief, improve disaster management
capabilities, and coordinate humanitarian assistance efforts.
ˆ Consultation and Dialogue: The Quad provides a platform for regular consultation and dialogue among member countries. It
facilitates exchanges of views, information sharing, and coordination on regional issues of common interest.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


57
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

SIGNIFICANCE OF QUAD FOR INDIA


ˆ Counterbalancing China: India sees the Quad as an opportunity to offer alternatives to China’s Belt and Road Initiative,
which challenges India’s territorial sovereignty and regional prominence. Through the Quad, India can collaborate with other
countries to maintain a rules-based order and balance China’s growing influence in the Indo-Pacific region.
ˆ Economic opportunities: Enhanced economic cooperation within the Quad can lead to increased trade, investment, and
technological collaboration for India. This can contribute to India’s economic growth and provide opportunities for diversifying
its trade partners.
ˆ Regional security: The Quad’s focus on maritime security and counterterrorism aligns with India’s security concerns as a
maritime nation. Collaboration within the Quad can bolster India’s capabilities and contribute to regional security, ensuring
freedom of navigation and countering common threats in the Indo-Pacific.
ˆ Infrastructure development: The Quad’s emphasis on infrastructure development resonates with India’s own initiatives such
as the “Act East” policy and the Indo-Pacific Oceans Initiative. Enhanced cooperation in infrastructure projects can improve
connectivity, trade facilitation, and economic integration, benefiting India and the region as a whole.
ˆ Advancing India’s interests in the Indo-Pacific: The Quad provides India with a powerful platform to advance its interests in
the Indo-Pacific. It aligns with India’s Act East policy and enables deeper engagement with countries in the region, including
through initiatives like the Asia Africa Growth Corridor.
ˆ Evolving foreign policy strategy: The Quad allows India to align with like-minded countries without entering into a formal
alliance or undermining its relationships with countries outside the Quad. This flexible approach reflects India’s evolving
foreign policy strategy.
ˆ Strengthening defence capabilities: Collaboration within the Quad can help India overcome limitations in terms of finances,
naval capacity, military reconnaissance, and technological and surveillance capabilities. It provides avenues for joint exercises,
information sharing, and capacity-building efforts.
CHALLENGES FACING QUAD
The Quad encounters various challenges that require attention to ensure its effectiveness and long-term success. These challenges
can be summarized as follows:
ˆ Impact on India’s other engagements: China argues that India’s growing proximity to the Quad, especially the United States,
has strained its relations with China and Russia while hindering progress in forums like BRICS and the Shanghai Cooperation
Organization. India must effectively manage its relationships with other countries to ensure that its participation in the Quad
does not hinder its other important bilateral and multilateral engagements.
ˆ Ambiguous objectives: Clear communication of the Quad’s objectives and focus areas is essential to avoid perceptions of
it being solely an anti-China alliance. Unclear objectives limit its potential in addressing important global issues such as
climate change cooperation and vaccine diplomacy. The Quad should actively engage in addressing a wider range of global
challenges beyond security concerns.
ˆ Pending issues:
‒ Climate change: While India has collaborated with Quad members on initiatives like the International Solar Alliance and
the Paris Agreement, it has not committed to targets like Net Zero emissions or a deadline for phasing out coal. Resolving
differences on climate change and achieving a shared approach are crucial for the Quad’s effectiveness.
‒ Cross-border data flows: India’s stance on cross-border data flows differs from other Quad countries, potentially
impacting digital cooperation, technology collaboration, and cybersecurity. Harmonizing approaches to data governance
is necessary to unlock the full potential of Quad collaboration.
ˆ Inconsistent signals from the United States: The recent announcement of the AUKUS trilateral defence partnership between
the United States, Australia, and the UK, made without prior consultation with Quad partners, has caused confusion among
allies. The Quad members must address such discrepancies and ensure clear communication and coordination to maintain
trust and unity within the group.
ˆ Diverging perspectives on risks and costs: Each Quad member has distinct considerations regarding the potential risks and
costs involved in countering China’s influence. Factors such as direct territorial disputes with China and varying perceptions
of the risks of retaliation need to be managed to maintain a cohesive approach. Understanding and accommodating each
nation’s strategic culture will be vital in addressing these divergences.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


58
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ China’s influence: China maintains strong economic ties with Quad members, particularly Australia, which it could exploit to
exert coercion or influence. India must navigate these dynamics carefully to safeguard its interests and protect its sovereignty.
Effectively addressing China’s influence poses a significant challenge for the Quad.
To overcome these challenges, the Quad members should prioritize open dialogue, transparent communication, and the
cultivation of trust among themselves. Managing relationships with other countries and regional forums is also crucial for ensuring
a balanced and comprehensive approach to regional and global affairs.
WAY FORWARD
The following steps should be taken to enhance the QUAD cooperation:
ˆ Collective action: The Quad nations should emphasize collective security to safeguard the freedom and security of member
nations. By working together, they can effectively address common challenges and threats in the Indo-Pacific region.
ˆ Clear vision: It is crucial for the Quad nations to articulate their Indo-Pacific Vision within a comprehensive framework that
encompasses economic and security interests. This clear vision will not only benefit the member nations but also reassure
other countries in the region about the positive impact of the Quad’s presence.
ˆ Expansion of the Quad: Considering India’s numerous partnerships in the Indo-Pacific, efforts should be made to invite
countries like Indonesia and Singapore to join the Quad in the future. Expanding the Quad will enhance its collective capabilities
and broaden its reach, strengthening its effectiveness and influence in the region.
ˆ Development of a maritime doctrine: India, in particular, should develop a comprehensive vision for the Indo-Pacific that
addresses current and future maritime challenges. This doctrine should involve the consolidation of military and non-military
tools, strategic engagement with partners, and a proactive approach to shaping the region’s security and stability.
By implementing these steps, the Quad can strengthen its cooperation, enhance regional security, and effectively address the
evolving challenges and opportunities in the Indo-Pacific.

WTO’S RULING AGAINST INDIA’S TECH TARIFFS


CONTEXT
In its recent panel ruling, the WTO upheld all EU claims against India and found that India’s tariffs on certain ICT products, such
as mobile phones, were not in line with its WTO commitments, and thus are illegal.
WHAT IS THE DISPUTE?
ˆ The dispute involves India’s tariffs on certain information and communication technology (ICT) products such as mobile
phones, which the EU, Japan, and Taiwan have claimed to be inconsistent with India’s WTO obligations.
ˆ In 2019, India imposed import duties on a variety of IT products, ranging from 7.5% to 20%. The products affected by the
duties included mobile phones, components, and integrated circuits.
ˆ The complainants argued that the duties exceeded the maximum tariff rate allowed under the ITA, (information technology
agreement) which is 0%.
ˆ The EU deemed these duties a direct breach of WTO rules, and argued that India was obliged under the WTO commitments
to apply a zero-duty rate to such products.

India’s Stand WTO Panel Ruling


ˆ To justify higher tariff rates, India argued that its binding tariff ˆ The panels concluded that India has violated Article II of the
commitments on ICT products are contained in the WTO General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) because India’s
Ministerial Declaration on Trade in Information Technology tariffs breach its Goods Schedule.
Products (ITA Agreement), which India joined in 1997. ˆ The panels held that India’s Goods Schedule, not the ITA, is
ˆ India also contended that its commitments under the ITA are the source of India’s legal obligations on tariffs, including on
‘static’ and argued that its commitments under the Goods products covered by the ITA.
Schedule do not include products that emerged due to ˆ The panels also held that the ITA cannot override the tariff
technological innovations after the conclusion of the ITA. commitments given in India’s Goods Schedule.
ˆ India had argued that there was an error during the ˆ The panels accepted India’s argument on HSN transposition but
transposition of its Goods Schedule from the Harmonized held that India failed to show that this assumption formed a
System of Nomenclature (HSN) 2002 edition to the HSN 2007 necessary basis for India’s consent to the Goods Schedule.
edition, which restricted the scope of its Goods Schedule.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


59
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

POSSIBLE IMPACTS OF THE RULING ON INDIA


ˆ Pressure to withdraw the tariffs: The rulings in three separate but similar disputes raised by the European Union (EU),
Chinese Taipei, and Japan will put pressure on India to withdraw the tariffs at a time it is seeking to be a leader in electronics
manufacturing through a production-linked incentive scheme.
ˆ Trade relations: The ruling could strain India’s trade relations with the European Union, Japan, and Taiwan, which have filed
complaints against India at the WTO.
ˆ Economic growth: The imposition of import duties was aimed at promoting domestic manufacturing and creating jobs in
the country. If the import duties are removed, it could impact India’s efforts to boost its manufacturing sector and reduce its
dependence on imports.
ˆ Revenue loss: The removal of import duties could lead to a loss of revenue for the Indian government, which has been
collecting tariffs on IT products.
ˆ Damage reputation: If the ruling goes against India, it could damage India’s reputation at the WTO and make it more difficult
for India to negotiate trade agreements in the future.
WHAT IS THE WAY AHEAD FOR THE DISPUTE?
ˆ India is likely to appeal against the panel ruling, but the Appellate Body that hears appeals has ceased to exist since 2019
because the United States has been blocking the appointment of the body’s members.
ˆ Thus, India’s appeal will go into the void. Legally, India will not be required to comply with the panel rulings till the time its
appeal is heard.
ˆ The EU has also approached India to resolve the matter through a multi-party interim appeal arbitration arrangement
(MPIA). However, India is against MPIA as a mechanism and is in favor of the restoration of the WTO appellate body.
ˆ Can EU retaliate?
‒ Under the WTO law, the EU cannot impose trade sanctions when an appeal is pending.
‒ Retaliatory action in the form of trade sanctions can be imposed only after the authorization of the Dispute Settlement
Body, which comprises all WTO members.

Key concepts and terms involved


ˆ General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT):
‒ It was an international trade agreement signed in 1947. 23 nations were signatories of this trade agreement. GATT came into effect
on January 1, 1948.
‒ India has been a member of GATT since 8 July 1948.
‒ The purpose of GATT was to liberalize trade by reducing tariffs and reducing quotas among member countries. The member nations
had to remove all the trade discriminations.
‒ The 7 rounds of negotiations from 1947 to 1993 reduced average tariffs on industrial goods from 40% to 5%. The steps taken at
GATT led to economic globalization.
ˆ MPIA (Multi-party interim appeal arbitration arrangement):
‒ It is an alternative system for resolving WTO disputes that are appealed by a member in the absence of a functioning and staffed
WTO Appellate Body.
‒ The MPIA embodies the WTO appellate review rules and in a dispute between members, it will supersede the previous appeal
processes and also apply to future disputes between members.
‒ Any member can join the MPIA by notifying the Dispute Settlement Body and a range of members have done so.
ˆ Information Technology Products (ITA Agreement):
‒ Adopted in 1996, is an arrangement through which select WTO member countries agree to eliminate duties on IT products.
‒ India joined ITA in 1997.
‒ Participants are committed to eliminating tariffs on IT products covered by the agreement, including computers, telecommunication
equipment, semiconductors, software, and more.
‒ The agreement is reviewed periodically, and new products can be added to its coverage.
ˆ The Harmonized System of Nomenclature (HSN)
‒ It is an international standardized system of names and numbers to classify traded products.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


60
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ It was developed by the World Customs Organization (WCO) and is used by over 200 countries as a basis for their customs tariffs
and for the collection of international trade statistics.
‒ The HSN contains over 5,000 product groups, organized into 21 sections, each identified by a two-digit code.
‒ The system provides a common language for international trade and simplifies the process of customs clearance by standardizing
the classification of products.
ˆ What is ‘transposition’ under HSN?
‒ Due to the continuous emergence of new products owing to technological innovations, the HSN system is regularly updated to
reflect new products, also known as ‘transposition’.
ˆ What are WTO Schedules?
‒ The specific commitments made by each of the WTO’s member states during the course of multilateral trade negotiations are
memorialized as “schedules of concessions.”
‒ These are referred to informally as schedules. Schedules constitute an integral part of both the 1994 General Agreement on Tariffs
and Trade (GATT 1994) and the General Agreement on Trade in Services (GATS).
‒ Note that schedules may be altered through subsequent formal negotiations or through technical modifications.
‒ Goods schedules may include maximum tariffs on specific types of goods, as well as agreements on quotas, export subsidies, and
domestic supports for particular industries.
‒ Services schedules usually take the form of commitments to open domestic markets to services provided by firms in other member
states, as well as specific exemptions from these commitments.
ˆ About the World Trade Organization (WTO)
‒ WTO is an international organization established to supervise and liberalize world trade.
‒ The WTO is the successor to the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), which was created in 1947.
‒ Members: The WTO has 164 member countries, and its headquarters is located in Geneva, Switzerland.
‒ India and WTO: India has been a WTO member since 1 January 1995 and a member of GATT since 8 July 1948.
‒ Objectives of WTO:
9 To promote free and fair trade
9 To provide a forum for trade negotiations
9 To administer and enforce WTO agreements
9 To cooperate with other international organisations
9 To Monitor National trade policies
9 To Provide technical assistance and training

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


61
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

SOCIETY

CHILD MALNUTRITION IN INDIA


CONTEXT
The UNICEF (United Nations International Children’s Emergency Fund), WHO (World Health Organization) and the World Bank
have jointly published the Joint Malnutrition Estimates (JME) 2023 report.
WHAT ARE JOINT MALNUTRITION ESTIMATES (JME)?
ˆ The UNICEF-WHO-World Bank JME Working Group was established in 2011 to harmonize child malnutrition estimates across
countries.
ˆ The inter-agency team releases annual child malnutrition estimates for the indicators stunting, wasting, overweight and
underweight.
ˆ The first edition of the JME was released in 2012. The key findings in the 2023 edition include global and regional trends for
all mentioned indicators as well as country-level modelled estimates.
WHAT ARE THE KEY FINDINGS OF THE REPORT FOR INDIA?

Child ˆ The report puts the overall prevalence of stunting in 2022 as per global estimates at 31.7% in case of India which is less
Stunting than the national estimates of 35.5% (National Family Health Survey (NFHS)-5 2019-21).
ˆ Stunting declined from 48% in 2006 (NFHS-3), to 38% in 2016 (NFHS- 4) and 35.5% in (NFHS-5).
ˆ There were 16 million fewer stunted children in India in 2022 as compared to 2012 and a decline in the prevalence rate
from 42% to 32%. Furthermore, India’s share in the global burden has declined from 30% to 25%.
ˆ According to the report, the multi-sectoral responses under Poshan Abhiyaan in 2018 and continued under Poshan 2.0
in 2022 seem to be contributing to the positive shift in the indicators.

Child ˆ The report highlights that wasting in children under five in India continues to be a challenge and much more efforts are
Wasting needed to address it.
ˆ The overall prevalence of wasting in 2022 as per global estimates is 18.7% in India similar to the national estimates of
19% (NFHS-5).
ˆ India’s share in the global burden of wasting is significant at 49%.
ˆ As per NFHS-4, in 2015-16 there were 21% children in the wasted category and 19.8% in 2005-06.

Child ˆ The prevalence of overweight marginally increased in a decade, from 2.2% in 2012 to 2.8% in 2022 (Less than the
Overweight national estimates of 3.4% (NFHS-5).
ˆ In terms of numbers, overweight children rose from 27,52,600 in 2012 (7.7% of the global share) to 31,81,900 in 2022
(8.8% of the global share).
ˆ However, the overall country classification of India for overweight children is low, and much lower than the global
prevalence of 5.6%.

WHAT IS CHILD MALNUTRITION?


ˆ Child malnutrition may be defined as a pathological state resulting from inadequate nutrition, including:
‒ Undernutrition (protein-energy malnutrition) due to insufficient intake of energy and other nutrients. There are several
sub-forms of undernutrition: wasting, stunting, and underweight.
‒ Overnutrition (overweight and obesity) due to excessive consumption of energy and other nutrients.
‒ Hidden hunger i.e., Deficiencies of essential vitamins and minerals – often referred to as micronutrients.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


62
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

MAJOR FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO CHILD MALNUTRITION IN INDIA


ˆ Insufficient Access to Healthy Food: Limited availability and access to nutritious food contribute to both undernutrition and
overnutrition, increasing the risks of low birthweight, childhood stunting, and overweight or obesity.
ˆ Feeding Habits and Lack of Nutritional Awareness: Inadequate knowledge about the nutritional value of food, misconceptions,
inappropriate child rearing and feeding practices contribute to undernutrition within families.
ˆ Poverty: Poverty restricts the purchasing power of individuals, making it difficult for them to afford an adequate quantity and
quality of food for their families. This creates a vicious cycle of poverty, undernutrition, reduced work capacity, low income,
and continued poverty.
ˆ Infections: Diseases like malaria, measles, and recurring bouts of diarrhea can precipitate acute malnutrition and exacerbate
existing nutritional deficiencies.
ˆ Maternal Anemia: Undernourished mothers often give birth to undernourished babies, leading to a worsening rate of
malnutrition. Difficulties in accessing proper nutrition benefits contribute to this issue.
ˆ Migration: Families migrating to cities in search of better livelihoods often find themselves excluded from government
schemes that are primarily delivered at the local level.
ˆ Socio-cultural Factors:
‒ Inequitable Food Distribution within Families: In many poor households, women and young children, especially girls,
receive less food compared to economically active male members.
‒ Large Families: Frequent pregnancies negatively impact the nutritional status of mothers, resulting in low birthweight
babies. Additionally, large families often face limited per capita availability of food.
‒ Poor Quality of Housing, Sanitation, and Water Supply: Inadequate living conditions contribute to ill health, infections,
and subsequent malnutrition.
IMPACTS OF CHILD MALNUTRITION
ˆ Impaired Physical Growth: Malnutrition, especially undernutrition, can result in stunted growth and delayed physical
development.
ˆ Cognitive and Intellectual Impairment: Malnourished children often suffer from cognitive and intellectual impairments,
including difficulties with learning, memory, attention, and problem-solving. These effects can hinder educational attainment
and limit future opportunities.
ˆ Increased Risk of Chronic Diseases: Malnourished children are at a higher risk of developing chronic diseases later in life, such
as diabetes, cardiovascular diseases, and obesity.
ˆ Economic impact: Undernutrition reduces economic advancement due to losses in productivity, poorer cognition, and poorer
educational outcomes. Iron deficiency reduces children’s ability to learn.
‒ India loses up to 4% of its gross domestic product and 8% of its productivity due to child malnutrition.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


63
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Initiatives taken by Government


ˆ Integrated Child Development Scheme and the Anganwadi system — to provide supplementary nutrition and ration to pregnant and
lactating women, run mid-day meal scheme in schools and maternity benefit programme.
ˆ The National Food Security Act 2013 assures food and nutrition security to the vulnerable and that access to food is a legal right.
ˆ National Nutrition Strategy (NITI Aayog) aims to reduce all forms of malnutrition by 2030, with a focus on the most vulnerable and
critical age groups.
ˆ POSHAN Abhiyaan to achieve improvement in nutritional status of Adolescent Girls, Pregnant Women and Lactating Mothers in a time
bound manner.
ˆ Mission POSHAN 2.0 seeks to address the challenges of malnutrition in children, adolescent girls, pregnant women, and lactating
mothers.

WAY FORWARD
ˆ Nutrition Education and Awareness: Raising awareness about the importance of balanced diets, optimal infant and young
child feeding practices, and the nutritional value of different foods.
ˆ Better Food Systems: Improving children’s nutrition requires food systems to deliver nutritious, safe, affordable, and
sustainable diets for all children.
ˆ Diversifying food production: by moving away from mono cropping of major cereals to a system that integrates a variety of
food items including small millets, pulses, fruits, and vegetables.
ˆ Fortification of complementary foods and staple foods: with micronutrients can be a cost-effective intervention to combat
hidden hunger in children.
ˆ Strengthen Maternal and Child Health Services: Particularly during pregnancy, childbirth, and the early years of a child’s life.
This includes providing adequate antenatal care, promoting breastfeeding, ensuring proper nutrition during pregnancy, and
delivering essential micronutrients and supplements to mothers and children.

INDIA’S HIGHER EDUCATION


CONTEXT
There is growing shortage of faculties in India’s higher education sector.
BACKGROUND
ˆ Largest Education System : India has one of the largest higher education systems in the world that stands second in terms of
the higher education network.
ˆ Tertiary Level Education: ‘Higher education’ in India denotes the tertiary level education that is imparted after 12 years of
schooling (10 years of primary education and 2 years of secondary education).
ˆ Higher Educational Institutions( HEIs): India today has over 1,000 Higher Educational Institutions (HEIs), including over 150
of national importance.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


64
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ISSUES IN INDIA’S HIGHER EDUCATION


ˆ Shortage of Faculty: The paucity of a sufficient number of faculty members undermines the growth of India’s knowledge
sector.
‒ There is no standing mechanism to collect the information shortage of faculties.
‒ Most academic institutions have messy and incomplete websites containing only partial information about their faculty
bodies.
‒ Widespread use of adjunct faculty members and even ‘ghost’ members by colleges and universities.
‒ Adjunct or part-time faculty members are often counted as part of the regular faculty to show off a favourable teacher-
student ratio.
‒ Sometimes positions of faculties also remain vacant due to caste-based discrimination.
ˆ Vacancies: In central universities (CUs), 75.2% of the sanctioned SC posts, 87.3% of the ST positions and 84.7% of the OBC
posts for the position of professor are lying vacant.
ˆ Lack of Inclusiveness: As per data of Lok Sabha, in 9 IITs, across India, the acceptance rate for SC/ST/OBC PhD candidates is
at or below 8%.
‒ Even after getting admission, it is challenging for students from the reserved category to continue the course.
‒ The dropout trends from these premium educational institutions have been from SC/ST/OBC categories.
ˆ Low GER: In India, currently, the gross enrolment ratio for Higher Education is less than 30%.
ˆ Lack of Staff: As a result of faculty shortage, professors are being overburdened.
‒ With understaffed universities, the classroom strength has increased to 100-150 and their working hours have increased
to 18 per day.
ˆ Lack of Financial Resources: Public spending on education has been relatively low in India since its inception. Most states
spend 2.5 to 3.2% of their GDP on education.
‒ In 1964, the Kothari Commission recommended increasing education expenditure from 2.9% to 6% of GDP.
‒ However, till date, India’s education budget has never been more than 3.5% of GDP.
ˆ Privatization: Many private colleges universities whose primary purpose is profit-seeking hire less qualified people in poorly
paid part-time positions as faculties. Consequently, the quality of education suffers.
ˆ Curriculum Disparity: There is a wide gap between industry requirements and curriculum taught at colleges. This also renders
graduates’ unemployable lacking in specific skill-sets.
ˆ Poor Research: India’s spending on research and development (R&D) is among the lowest in the world, as per a study
conducted by government think-tank NITI Aayog.
‒ R&D investment in India has declined from 0.8% of the GDP in 2008–09 to 0.7% in 2017-18.
‒ Only 2.7% Colleges run Ph.D. programme and 35.04% Colleges run Post Graduate Level programmes in India
ˆ Under-representation of Women: As per Ministry of Education’s National Institutional Ranking Framework (NIRF), India’s
best educational institutions rank quite poorly in women diversity.
‒ The scores have been dismal in India’s top 10 engineering institutes.
ˆ Autonomy: The over-regulation by regulators such as UGC, MCI, which decide on aspects of standards, appointments, fees
structure and curriculum has further deterred new institutions from opening campuses.
GOVERNMENT INITIATIVES FOR IMPROVING HIGHER EDUCATION
ˆ National Education Policy 2020: The National Education Policy 2020 proposes various reforms in India’s higher education
including technical education.
‒ NEP aims to increase the gross enrollment ratio (GER) to 50% by 2035 through six focus areas: student centricity, faculty,
research and innovation, governance, equity and inclusion, and digital learning.
‒ NEP aims to establish National Research Foundation (NRF) for connecting academia with ministries and industry and
fund research that is relevant to local needs.
‒ NEP provides for a new governance model and shall grant graded autonomy for HEIs.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


65
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Independent boards will manage the HEIs with active participation from alumni and experts from academia, research and
industry.
‒ For higher education, the government has promised a budget allocation for education as a fixed percentage of Gross
Domestic Product at 6%.
‒ NEP promotes internationalization of education.
ˆ This approach includes facilitating research exchange with high-quality foreign HEI, encouraging high performing Indian
universities to set up campuses in other countries.
ˆ Selected universities from among the top 100 universities in the world will be facilitated to operate in India.

ˆ The Institute of Eminence (IoE) : It is a recognition scheme under University Grants Commission (UGC) that helps empower
higher educational institutions.
‒ The HRD Ministry of India grants the Institution of Eminence status to multiple universities.
‒ Academic institutions that can impart highest quality education, generate cutting edge research, and attract the best and
the brightest from across the globe can have multiplier beneficial effects for the country.

ˆ Rashtriya Uchchatar Shiksha Abhiyan (RUSA): It is a Centrally Sponsored Scheme (CSS), that aims at providing strategic
funding to eligible state higher educational institutions.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


66
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Education Quality Upgradation and Inclusion Programme (EQUIP)’: This is a five-year vision plan to improve the quality and
accessibility of higher education over the next five years (2019-2024). It aims to:
‒ Double the Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) in higher education and resolve the geographically and socially skewed access to
higher education institutions in India.
‒ Position at least 50 Indian institutions among the top-1000 global universities.
ˆ Global Initiative for Academics Network (GIAN): The programme seeks to invite distinguished academicians, entrepreneurs,
scientists, experts from premier institutions from across the world, to teach in the higher educational institutions in India.
ˆ All India Survey on Higher Education (AISHE): The main objectives of the survey are to identify and capture all the institutions
of higher learning in the country; and collect the data from all the higher education institutions on various aspects of higher
education.

INTEGRATED MEDICINE
CONTEXT
The Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR) and the AYUSH Ministry have signed a Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) for
collaboration and cooperation for research in the field of integrated medicine.
INTEGRATED MEDICINE
ˆ Definition: An integrated system of medicine combines different healthcare practices to provide the most effective treatment
for the patient.
‒ This approach blends “Western” medicine, with alternative or traditional practices such as Ayurveda, acupuncture, yoga,
or naturopathy.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


67
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Aim: Integrative medicine is aimed at harnessing the potential of India’s rich heritage and medical knowledge, along with
using modern advancements in allopathy.
ˆ Orthodox Systems: They are one in which medical doctors and other healthcare professionals treat symptoms and diseases
using drugs, radiation, or surgery.
ˆ It is also called as allopathic medicine or Western medicine.
ˆ Traditional System: In India, traditional medicine encompasses practices such as yoga, Ayurveda, Siddha that have been part
of Indian tradition historically and homeopathy that became part of Indian tradition over the years.
NEED FOR INTEGRATED SYSTEM OF MEDICINE
ˆ Increasing Demand: Ayurveda, yoga, naturopathy, Unani, Siddha, and homoeopathy make up India’s system of alternative
medicine (AYUSH).
‒ India is regarded as the centre of alternative medicine due to the wealth of old scientific knowledge.
‒ The market in India is now seeing a surge in demand for AYUSH and alternative medicines as a result of growing public
awareness of the usefulness and effectiveness of traditional medical systems.
ˆ Export of Alternative Medicines: India is currently one of the top exporters of alternative medicines worldwide. The United
States and European nations like Germany and France are major export destinations.
ˆ Impact of COVID 19: A dramatic increase in the use of alternative medicines was observed in Covid-19 due to several factors.
For instance, the demand for honey, chyawanprash, and turmeric in ayurvedic stores has increased by 45%, 85%, and 40%,
respectively.
ˆ Global Emphasis: The WHO Traditional Medicine Strategy 2014–2023 has put an emphasis on the integration of traditional and
complementary medicine to advance universal healthcare and guarantee the quality, safety, and efficacy of such treatments.
ˆ Challenges Posed by NCDs: The significance of Yoga, Ayurveda, Homeopathy, Siddha and Unani medical systems have grown
especially due to the challenges of Non-Communicable Diseases (NCDs), multidrug-resistant diseases, lifestyle disorders, long
term diseases.
KEY POINTS OF THE MOU

Integrative Health ˆ Cooperation and collaboration between Ministry of AYUSH and ICMR for exploring the areas of convergence
Research and synergy for integrative health research and strengthening research capacity.

Diseases of National ˆ M/o Ayush and ICMR shall work on public health research initiatives for addressing diseases of national
Importance importance.

High-Quality Clinical ˆ Efforts will be made to conduct high-quality clinical trials jointly on diseases of national importance with
trials for Validation promising therapies of Ayush system to generate evidence for wider acceptance.

Joint Working ˆ A joint working group will be created between the Ministry and the ICMR that will explore areas of collaboration
Group and work on deliverables.

Research Capacity ˆ The fostering of research capacity will be led by ICMR for Ayush researchers.
ˆ ICMR will develop a curriculum, facilitate the development and delivery of training modules.
ˆ Scholars and researchers of the organisations will have access to advanced instrumentation systems, and other
infrastructural facilities.

Seminars and ˆ Both institutions will conduct conferences, workshops and seminars with participation of researchers interested
Workshops in the field of integrated healthcare.

Significance ˆ It will combine traditional knowledge with modern research and boost ayurveda’s identity on the basis of
scientific evidence.
ˆ It will promote integrative research to generate evidence in priority areas of national importance in healthcare
utilizing modern scientific methods.
ˆ This MoU will prove to be very important in enriching Ayush system of medicines.
ˆ This cooperation will facilitate scientific validation and provide evidence for AYUSH systems by other countries.
ˆ This collaboration will lead to Ayush departments in AIIMS to evolve into departments of Integrated Medicine
across entire AIIMS infrastructure in India.
ˆ This move will offer patients the benefit of integrated medicine in India.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


68
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ADVANTAGES OF INTEGRATED SYSTEM OF MEDICINE


ˆ Adjunctive Therapy: Traditional practices like Ayurveda and
yoga can be used as adjunctive therapies along with with
modern medicine to potentially enhance treatment outcomes.
‒ For example, yoga can aid in treating conditions like
migraine headaches and recurrent vasovagal syncope
when used alongside conventional therapies.
ˆ Cost-effectiveness: Traditional therapies often prove to be
more cost-effective than modern ones.
‒ Practices such as yoga require minimal resources and can
be performed virtually anywhere, making them accessible
and affordable healthcare options.
ˆ Patient Satisfaction: Integrating traditional and modern
medicines may provide more comprehensive care, potentially
leading to improved patient satisfaction.
‒ It may allow patients to feel more involved and in control
of their healthcare.
ˆ Preventive Care: Many traditional medical systems, like
Ayurveda and yoga, emphasize the prevention of diseases
through a balanced lifestyle, diet, and regular exercise.
‒ This can help reduce the incidence of chronic diseases and improve overall health.
ˆ Less Side Effects: Many traditional practices are known for having less side effects compared to modern medicine. Yoga, for
instance, generally does not have adverse effects, unlike many pharmaceutical treatments.
ˆ Supports the ‘One Health’ Approach’: The Integrated System of Medicine supports the ‘One Health’ approach, which enables
coordinated action across human, animal, and agricultural sectors for judicious antibiotic use.
‒ It provides a multidisciplinary platform that holistically addresses antibiotic utilization, thereby contributing to better
health outcomes.
ˆ Holistic Approach: An integrated system of medicine allows for a holistic approach to patient care, considering the complete
physical, mental, and emotional well-being of the person, rather than focusing solely on disease treatment.
CHALLENGES IN EXPANDING INTEGRATED MEDICINE
ˆ Lack of Scientific Validation: Traditional systems have failed to keep pace with the intellectual and scientific advances of the
times. So, it has diminished evidence-based quality.
‒ By and large, very few Ayurvedic treatments have been successfully validated by well-designed randomised controlled
trials (RCTs).
ˆ Sub Standard Courses: Ayurvedic practitioners’ graduation courses are often substandard and the post-graduate courses
offered at most of their institutes are of extremely poor quality.
ˆ Lack of Practice: While MBBS graduates and post-graduates from public hospitals have to mandatorily serve a specified bond
period in rural areas, graduates and post-graduates from AYUSH public hospitals are not subjected to any such restrictions.
ˆ Lack of Ecosystem: Traditional Systems lack a vibrant ecosystem of science and research.
ˆ Trial and Error Methods: Traditional practitioners have to discover treatments and approaches that actually work. It involves
a lot of trial and error with patients and leads to an erosion of the practitioner’s reputation.
ˆ Lack of Investment: Despite numerous efforts made by individuals and organizations to conduct research, the lack of
investment into traditional research has been a major setback.
‒ With limited people undergoing treatment with Ayurvedic medicines, the availability of data for analysis and publication
becomes limited.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


69
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

WAY FORWARD
ˆ The government could take a more active role in developing and implementing policies that promote the integration of
traditional and modern medicine.
‒ This could involve creating a regulatory framework that recognizes and supports the use of traditional medicine alongside
modern medicine.
ˆ The Government must stop treating AYUSH education with liberal mindset and subject them to the same stringent norms and
requirements expected from practitioners of modern medicine.
ˆ The government should also focus on Capacity-building of licensed AYUSH practitioners through bridge training to meet
India’s primary care needs.
ˆ AYUSH medicines should be put through rigorous trials in order to be accepted as legitimate medications in the present times.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


70
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ECONOMICS

DE-DOLLARISATION
CONTEXT
Various countries have been attempting to De-dollarise the US Dollar.What is De dollarisation?
De-dollarisation refers to the replacement of the
U.S. dollar (currently dominant global reserve
currency) by other currencies.
Reserve Currency:
ˆ Reserve currency is a type of currency
that is extensively utilized for conducting
international trade transactions and is often
kept as a reserve asset by central banks
around the world.
ˆ In other words, it is a currency that is
recognized and accepted globally, and is used
as a means of payment for international trade
and investment activities.
ˆ Central banks hold reserves of this currency
to maintain stability in their respective
economies and to facilitate international
transactions.
GLOBAL TREND
Throughout history, the dominant global reserve
currency has shifted several times.
ˆ The British pound was the primary reserve
currency during the 19th and early 20th
centuries, but it lost its status after World War
II, and the U.S. dollar became the dominant
reserve currency.
ˆ The U.S. dollar has held this position since
then, with over 60% of global foreign
exchange reserves held in dollars as of 2021.
ˆ However, in recent years, there have been
increasing efforts by various countries to
reduce their dependence on the U.S. dollar
and to diversify their reserves by holding
other currencies such as the euro, Japanese
yen, and Chinese yuan.
‒ This comes in the aftermath of Russia’s invasion of Ukraine.
‒ The U.S. imposed several sanctions that restricted the use of the U.S. dollar to purchase oil and other goods from Russia,
and this has been seen by many countries as an attempt to weaponize the dollar.
‒ Since international transactions carried out in the U.S. dollar are cleared by American banks, this gives the U.S. government
significant power to oversee and control these transactions.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


71
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

REASONS FOR POPULARITY OF US DOLLAR


ˆ The dominance of the U.S. dollar in international transactions is not just due to coercion or manipulation by the U.S.
government, but rather it is a result of the preference of market participants for the U.S. dollar due to various economic
reasons.
‒ For example, a recent attempt by India and Russia to carry out trade between the two countries in Indian rupees rather
than in U.S. dollars has hit a roadblock because the value of India’s imports from Russia far outweighs its exports to the
country.
‒ This left Russia with excess rupees in hand which it was unwilling to spend on Indian goods or assets, and led to Russian
demands for the settlement of bilateral trade in U.S. dollars.
‒ So, even Russia, a long-time friend of India and a long-time foe of the United States, preferred to carry out its trade with
India using U.S. dollars since the dollar is far more widely acceptable than the Indian rupee.
ˆ High Level of Trust: The global acceptability of the U.S. dollar as a reserve currency is primarily due to the popularity of U.S.
assets among investors, despite the fact that the U.S. has been running a trade deficit for decades.
‒ The excess dollars accumulated by the rest of the world due to the U.S. trade deficit have been invested in U.S. assets,
such as debt securities issued by the U.S. government, indicating the high level of trust that global investors have in the
U.S. financial markets.
ˆ Rule of Law: This trust may be due to the ‘rule of law’ in the U.S. On the other hand, China, which supplies the world with
huge volumes of goods and runs a trade surplus, has been trying to make the yuan a reserve currency. However, restrictions
placed by the Chinese government on foreign access to China’s financial markets and doubts over ‘rule of law’ in China have
adversely affected global demand for the yuan.
NEED FOR DE- DOLLARISATION
ˆ Diversification of Risk: Holding a basket of currencies instead of just one currency (i.e., the US dollar) can help to diversify a
country’s risk exposure and reduce the potential negative impact of a sudden currency devaluation or other economic shocks/
political changes in the US.
ˆ Improving Economic Stability: By diversifying their reserves, countries can reduce their exposure to currency fluctuations and
interest rate changes, which can help to improve economic stability and reduce the risk of financial crises.
ˆ Increasing Trade and Investment: By using other currencies, countries can increase trade and investment with other countries
that may not have a strong relationship with the US, which can open up new markets and opportunities for growth.
ˆ Reducing US Monetary Policy Influence: By reducing the use of the US dollar, countries can reduce the influence of US
monetary policy on their own economies and increase their economic autonomy.
ˆ Direct Trade in Country’s National Currency: Direct trade in a country’s national currency can lead to savings on currency
conversion spreads and transaction costs.
ˆ Global Economic Balance: A shift away from the US dollar as the dominant reserve currency could lead to a more balanced
global economic system and reduce the risk of economic imbalances and instability caused by the dominance of one currency.
ˆ Geopolitical Benefits: By reducing dependence on the US dollar, countries may be able to improve their geopolitical standing
and increase their bargaining power in international relations.
CHALLENGES OF DE DOLLARISATION
ˆ Market Volatility and Global Financial Crisis: A sudden shift away from the dollar could create market volatility and instability,
as many countries and businesses are heavily reliant on the dollar for trade and investment and any change would lead to a
potential global financial crisis.
ˆ Trade Disruptions: A move away from the dollar could also disrupt international trade, as businesses and governments adjust
to new currencies and exchange rate regimes.
ˆ Exchange Rate Risk: De-dollarisation can expose countries to exchange rate risk, as they may have to convert their reserves
into other currencies that are subject to volatility.
ˆ Limited Acceptance: National currencies may not be as widely accepted or trusted as the dollar, which can make it difficult for
countries to use them in international trade.
ˆ Currency Manipulation: The dominance of the dollar in global trade allows the US government to manipulate its currency to
gain an economic advantage over other countries.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


72
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Geopolitical Risks: A shift away from the dollar can be seen as a challenge to US economic and geopolitical power, which could
lead to political tensions and even conflict.
ˆ Difficulty in Establishing a New Global Reserve Currency: Establishing a new global reserve currency can be difficult and
complex, as it requires the support of many countries and a stable economic and political environment.
ˆ Potential for Conflict: De-dollarisation efforts by one country or group of countries could lead to conflict with the US
government or other countries that benefit from the dollar’s dominance in the global economy.
ˆ Lack of Market Depth: Some national currencies may not have the same level of market depth and liquidity as the dollar,
which can make it difficult for countries to use them as a reserve currency.
ˆ Monetary Sovereignty: The hegemonic role of the dollar limits the monetary sovereignty of other countries by making it
difficult for them to use monetary policy to stabilise their economies.
ˆ Debasement of the Currency: When a country’s fiat currency enjoys reserve currency status, it gives the country the power
to purchase goods and other assets from the rest of the world by simply creating fresh currency. However, such irresponsible
expansion of the money supply can cause the debasement of the currency and eventually threaten its status as a reserve
currency.
INTERNATIONAL EFFORTS
There have been global efforts towards de-dollarisation, including:
ˆ Bilateral currency swaps among countries, promotion of trade in national currencies, and the establishment of alternative
payment systems.
‒ For example, ASEAN countries, China, Japan, and South Korea have bilateral currency swaps amounting to USD 380 billion
and rising, while the South African rand is used by several African countries.
ˆ The BRICS’s New Development Bank encourages trade and investment in national currencies by disbursing up to 50% of its
loans in national currencies since 2015.
ˆ China has developed the Renminbi and offers clearing and settlement services for cross-border yuan payments and trade.
ˆ Russian banks have started using the China-based Cross-Border Interbank Payment System for international payments as they
are debarred from the SWIFT international system.
ˆ Some countries are also exploring the possibility of using cryptocurrencies for international trade and payments, as they offer
a decentralized alternative to traditional payment systems.
NATIONAL EFFORTS
ˆ Reserve Bank of India (RBI) recently unveiled a rupee settlement system for international trade by allowing special vostro
accounts in designated Indian banks, a step towards internationalising the rupee.
ˆ Similarly, India and Russia are considering the use of a third currency or the inclusion of a third country like UAE to facilitate
oil trade between the two countries.

DECARBONIZING STEEL SECTOR


CONTEXT
Decarbonisation of steel sector is an integral part of the India’s ability to achieve its climate goal. A recent study has tried to
minimize use of carbon in steel making.
MORE ON THE NEWS
Global Carbon footprint in Steel sector:
ˆ Studies have shown that, steel sector contributes to 8% of global carbon emissions.
ˆ Coal-fired furnaces: More than 75% of steel currently produced in the world is made in coal-fired furnaces, which emits large amounts
of carbon dioxide into the atmosphere.
ˆ Heat energy: Furnaces must be heated above 1000 degree Celsius for manufacturing steel. The energy needed to heat the furnaces is
usually through electric current, which further increased energy demand.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


73
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ To produce one ton of steel, 1.8 ton of carbon dioxide is released. India being second largest producer of steel in the world
has one of the largest carbon footprints.
ˆ Existing procedure: To separate iron from iron oxide, coke is heated with the ore. The resulting chemical reaction separates
carbon and produces strong steel.
‒ This process accounts for almost 90% of the carbon footprint of steelmaking.
ˆ The solution:
‒ Using hydrogen: Scientists have thought of using hydrogen in place of carbon to separate iron from the ore. However, this
reaction is very slow.
‒ This is because, removal of oxygen results in small pores. When hydrogen is the reactant, water is formed while hydrogen
reacts with oxide, which becomes trapped inside the pores.
9 This process reoxidises the iron and considerably slows oxygen removal.
‒ Researchers have suggested creating narrow channels on the mineral for water to drain, ensuring that hydrogen enters
them and continue removing oxygen.
‒ However, this procedure has several challenges, such as reduction kinetics and the high cost of hydrogen reactants.
WHAT IS DECARBONIZATION?
ˆ Decarbonization is a process of sustainably reducing and compensating the emissions of carbon dioxide (CO₂). The goal is to
create a carbon-free economy.
ˆ Importance of decarbonization of steel sector:
‒ Achieve climate goals: Experts have said that emissions from steel must be reduced by 50% by 2050 and then continue to
fall, to meet the world’s climate goals.
‒ Reduce dependency on fossil fuels: Decarbonisation will help reduce the dependency of steel industry on fossil fuels. This
will ensure the rise of alternative sources.
‒ Reduce import bill: Majority of coal used in iron smelting is imported into countries such as India and Japan. Reducing use
of coal will also reduce import bill.
‒ Sustainability: The existing process of steel production is too dependent on non-renewable energy sources. Decarbonisation
will make the process more sustainable and long-lasting.
REDUCING CARBON EMISSION FROM STEEL SECTOR

Green Steel:
Green steel is a type of steel that is manufactured without using any fossil fuels. It uses alternative energy sources such as
hydrogen, coal gasification, or electricity in production.

ˆ Carbon capture and utilization technology: There are many types of equipment that can capture the CO2 released and store
them without emitting back. This can reduce carbon footprint.
ˆ Steel recycling: Instead of mining iron and later converting into steel, scrap can be smelted and molded to manufacture steel.
This reduces carbon footprint considerably.
ˆ Hydrogen fuel: Using green/blue hydrogen in furnace produces only water as by-product. This process is completely free of
CO₂ emissions.
ˆ Renewable energy furnaces: Instead of coal furnaces, electric energy furnaces can be used. These have to be run on renewable
energy to make the process carbon-free.
ˆ Syngas: It is a product of coal gasification. Syngas can be used more efficiently than direct combustion of the original fuel,
which is coal.
CHALLENGES INVOLVED IN DECARBONIZATION
ˆ High cost: The cost of shifting to carbon-free technologies is very high, leading to increase in cost of steel. This can increase
burden on consumers.
ˆ Knowledge gaps: Lack of access to relevant information is important barrier for implementing decarbonizing process in steel-
making.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


74
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Lack of urgency: Countries have not announced any urgency to implement decarbonization measures for steel sector. This is
a major barrier in promoting green technologies.

Efforts in India to Decarbonize Steel Sector


ˆ National Green Hydrogen Mission: The mission aims to increase production of green hydrogen, which has zero-carbon footprint.
‒ The eco-friendly hydrogen can be used in manufacture of steel instead of coke.
ˆ Motor Vehicles (Registration and Functions of Vehicles Scrapping Facility) Rules: Ministry of Road transport has announced a detailed
scrappage policy for old motor vehicles. The policy is expected to increase availability of scrap in the steel sector.
ˆ Steel Scrap Recycling Policy, 2019: This policy aims to produce steel from recycled scrap, without mining or through manufacturing new
ones.
ˆ Perform, Achieve and Trade (PAT) scheme: Implemented under National Mission for Enhanced Energy Efficiency, it incentivizes steel
industry to reduce energy consumption, including that of coal.
ˆ The National Solar Mission: It promotes the use of solar energy in furnaces and aims to reduce emissions in the steel industry.

WAY FORWARD
ˆ Overcoming the challenges related to decarbonization requires the contribution and cooperation of all industry stakeholders,
including the government, steel companies and also the consumers.
ˆ A lot of handholding is required for companies to implement green technologies that reduce emissions and also keep their
operation costs minimum.

GIG WORKERS AND CODE ON SOCIAL SECURITY, 2020


CONTEXT
The recent strike by Zomato-owned Blinkit delivery agents and recognition of gig work under only one of the four new labor codes
have once again brought to the forefront issues plaguing the gig economy in the country.
WHO IS A ‘GIG WORKER’?
ˆ Gig workers refer to workers outside of the traditional employer-employee relationship.
ˆ There are two groups of gig workers:
‒ Platform workers: When gig workers use online algorithmic matching platforms or apps to connect with customers, they
are called platform workers.
‒ Non-platform workers: Those who work outside the above platforms are non-platform workers, including construction
workers and non-technology-based temporary workers.
WHAT IS THE CHALLENGE IN CATEGORIZING GIG WORKERS?
ˆ Whether gig workers should be categorised as ‘employees’ or as ‘independent contractors’ has been a heated debate.
‒ In India, employees are entitled to a host of benefits under statutes such as the Minimum Wages Act, 1948, Employees’
Provident Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952 (EPFA) etc.
‒ Similarly, contract labourers are governed under the Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970 and are also
entitled to benefits such as provident funds.
ˆ However, given the unique nature of gig work, gig workers display characteristics of both employees and independent
contractors and thus do not squarely fit into any rigid categorization.
ˆ As a result, gig workers have limited recognition under current employment laws and thus fall outside the ambit of statutory
benefits.
CODE ON SOCIAL SECURITY, 2020’S INTERPRETATION ON GIG WORKERS
ˆ The Ministry of Labour and Employment introduced the Code on Social Security, 2020 which brings gig workers within the
ambit of labour laws for the first time.
ˆ Key features of the code for gig workers:
‒ Definition of gig worker: Under section 2(35) of the Code, a ‘gig worker’ is defined as ‘a person who performs work or
participates in a work arrangement and earns from such activities outside of a traditional employer-employee relationship’.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


75
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Definition of platform work: The Code defines platform work as ‘a work arrangement outside of a traditional employer-
employee relationship in which organisations or individuals use an online platform to access other organisations or
individuals to solve specific problems or to provide specific services” in exchange for payment.
‒ The Code stipulates that Central and State governments must frame suitable social security schemes for gig workers on
matters relating to health and maternity benefits, provident funds and accident benefits among others.
‒ The Code also mandates the compulsory registration of all gig workers and platform workers to avail of the benefits
under these schemes.
WHAT ARE SOME OF THE CONCERNS?

About the four new labour codes


ˆ The new labour codes seek to consolidate 29 existing statutes on labour that require a critical reformation since decades.
ˆ The Four Codes are:
‒ The Code on Wages, 2019;
‒ The Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditions Code, 2020;
‒ The Code on Social Security, 2020;
‒ The Industrial Relations Code, 2020.
ˆ The codes are based on recommendations of the Second National Commission on Labour (2002).
ˆ The implementation process is delayed as states are yet to finalize their rules under these codes.

ˆ Exclusion from benefits: Out of the four new labour codes proposed, gig work finds reference only in the Code on Social
Security. As a result, gig workers remain excluded from vital benefits and protections offered by other Codes such as minimum
wage, occupational safety etc.
ˆ Cannot form unions: They also cannot create legally recognised unions.
ˆ Lack of redressal mechanism: Moreover, they remain excluded from accessing the specialized redressal mechanism under the
Industrial Disputes Act, 1947, denying them an effective remedy for grievances against their employers.
ˆ No collective bargaining: Considering the non-traditional nature of their work, gig workers also do not have the right to
collective bargaining — a fundamental principle of modern labour law crucial to safeguard the rights of workers.
POTENTIAL OF GIG ECONOMY IN INDIA
ˆ According to a report titled ‘India’s Booming Gig and Platform Economy’ released by NITI Aayog, 77 lakh workers were
engaged in the gig economy in 2020–21. They constituted 2.6% of the non-agricultural workforce or 1.5% of the total
workforce in India.
ˆ The gig workforce is expected to expand to 2.35 crore (23.5 million) workers by 2029–30.
ˆ Gig workers are expected to form 6.7% of the non-agricultural workforce or 4.1% of the total livelihood in India by 2029–30.
ˆ At present, about 47% of the gig work is in medium skilled jobs, about 22% in high skilled, and about 31% in low skilled jobs.
ˆ Trend shows the concentration of workers in medium skills is gradually declining and that of the low skilled and high skilled
is increasing.
PROS AND CONS OF GIG ECONOMY

Advantages of Working in a Gig Economy Disadvantages of gig economy


Flexibility for Workers: Gig workers have the flexibility to work Job Insecurity: Gig workers often work on a day-to-day basis and
according to their own schedule and availability, and can often may be terminated without notice, as seen during the pandemic.
choose their own work hours.

Cost Efficiency for Companies: Companies can save costs by hiring Lack of Benefits: Gig workers typically have no social security
gig workers instead of full-time employees, and may be able to benefits, paid leave, or wage regulation, and may be at the mercy of
provide services more economically to users. platform companies.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


76
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Advantages of Working in a Gig Economy Disadvantages of gig economy


Opportunities for Low-Skilled Workers: The gig economy provides Poor Work Conditions: Many gig workers are required to work long
jobs for many low and semi-skilled workers, often with minimal hours with little transparency on incentive structures and may have
conditions. little bargaining power.

Experience Gain: Young workers can gain valuable work experience Hidden Charges: Platform companies may charge high commissions
through gig work before transitioning to formal employment. on gig workers to sustain discounts offered to users.

Economical: Gig workers can save costs by working remotely and Low Bargaining Power: Gig workers often lack a voice and may face
avoiding expenses like office commute. delays in payments or lack of access to basic amenities.

Entrepreneurial Opportunities: Gig work can also offer Unequal Treatment: Gig workers may be subject to unfair treatment
entrepreneurial opportunities, allowing workers to start their own or exploitation, such as low pay, long working hours, or unsafe
businesses or work as independent contractors with multiple clients. working conditions.

Income Generation: Gig work can provide a source of income for Limited Career Growth: As gig workers may not have access to
individuals who may not have access to traditional employment, training or development programs, or be able to build long-term
such as those with disabilities or those living in remote areas. relationships with clients.

Access to Global Markets: The gig economy allows workers Social Isolation: Gig work may be isolating, as gig workers often
to connect with clients and customers from around the world, work independently and may not have the same social connections
potentially expanding their customer base and income opportunities or support networks as traditional employees.

RECOMMENDATIONS BY NITI AAYOG FOR GIG ECONOMY


ˆ Access to Skill and Finance: Provide financial products and cash flow-based loans to platform workers. Platforms can
collaborate with the Ministry of Skill Development to promote skilling and job creation in the gig economy.
ˆ Focus on Women: It recommends businesses to implement programmes for workers and their families that raise knowledge
of gender issues and accessibility, especially to advance the rights of women and people with disabilities.
ˆ Data Collection: Other recommendations include undertaking a separate enumeration exercise to estimate the size of the
gig and platform workforce and collecting information during official enumerations (Periodic Labour Force Survey) to identify
gig workers.
ˆ Free trade agreement: creating pathways for education and certification acquired in India to be recognised globally, such as
through FTAs.
ˆ Innovation: Platforms and businesses can innovate to create new models that provide gig workers with better pay, benefits,
and job security. This could include the development of new technologies, such as blockchain and AI that enable more
transparent and secure gig work arrangements.

GREEN HYDROGEN FUEL


CONTEXT
Gujarat shall become India’s green hydrogen manufacturing hub and will retain its dominance over the industrial sector.
MORE ON NEWS
ˆ Green Energy Projects in Gujarat: Gujarat has signed memorandums of understanding with big corporates, including Reliance,
Adani which have pledged huge investments in green energy projects and have been allotted land for the same.
‒ Gujarat aims to become a hub for green hydrogen by creating a production capacity of 8 metric tonnes per annum (MTPA)
by 2035.
ˆ Huge Investments: Gujarat will have investments of ₹8-10 lakh crore and it will generate lakhs of new employment
opportunities.
ˆ New Policy: Gujarat is also framing a new policy for green hydrogen manufacturing, which will be given the status of a priority
sector.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


77
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

GREEN HYDROGEN
ˆ Hydrogen & Its Uses: Hydrogen is the lightest element found in nature.
‒ Water, fossil fuels, or biomass can all be used to produce hydrogen, which can then be separated and used as a fuel or
source of energy.
‒ It is more environment-friendly as it does not produce carbon-dioxide (produced by combustion of fossil fuels) and thus
does not contribute to climate change.
ˆ Types of Hydrogen:
‒ Grey Hydrogen is traditionally produced from methane (CH4), split with steam into carbon-dioxide (CO2, Green House
Gas) and hydrogen.
ˆ Grey hydrogen is increasingly being produced from coal, with significantly higher CO2 emissions per unit of hydrogen produced.
ˆ It has no energy transition value.
‒ Blue Hydrogen follows the same process as grey. However, the CO2 produced is captured and stored for long term
through suitable technology.
ˆ It is not possible to capture 100% of the CO2 produced and not all means of storing it are equally effective in the long term.
‒ Turquoise Hydrogen is made using a process called methane pyrolysis to produce hydrogen and solid carbon. In the
future, turquoise hydrogen may be valued as a low-emission hydrogen.
‒ Green Hydrogen is defined as hydrogen produced by splitting water into hydrogen and oxygen using renewable electricity.
ˆ Benefits of Green Hydrogen:
‒ Net Zero Transition: The use of hydrogen in combustion has zero GHG emissions.
ˆ Since, renewable energy is used in producing the Green Hydrogen, the entire chain (production to consumption) has very low
GHG emissions . Thus, Green Hydrogen is vital to Net Zero transition.
ˆ It can be utilized to decarbonize the heavy industry, long haul freight, shipping, and aviation sectors.
‒   Energy Storage Solution: Hydrogen is emerging as one of the leading options for storing energy from renewables.
ˆ Hydrogen-based fuels can potentially transport energy from renewables over long distances; from regions with abundant
energy resources, to energy-consumption areas.
‒ Versatility: Green Hydrogen can be transformed into electricity or synthetic gas and used for commercial, industrial or
mobility purposes.
‒ Availability of Water: Green Hydrogen can be produced from water which has abundant availability.
INDIAN AND GREEN HYDROGEN
ˆ Achieve Net Zero Emissions: India is the third-largest emitter of carbon dioxide (CO2) globally. Adoption of Green Hydrogen
will facilitate India’s goal of lowering its carbon footprint and attaining net zero emissions by 2070.
ˆ Decarbonization: Carbon-free hydrogen will enable substantial decarbonization in industries that produce iron ore and steel,
fertilizers, methanol, refining and emit significant volumes of carbon dioxide (CO2).
ˆ Self Sufficiency: India’s energy landscape is at a crucial turning point, and green hydrogen will have an essential role in making
the country self-sufficient by 2047 and energy independent.
ˆ Less Imports: Presently, India spends more than US$ 160 billion in foreign exchange every year for energy imports. A
comprehensive action plan for establishing a Green Hydrogen economy can make India a hub for the production and export
of green hydrogen.
SECTORS IN INDIA FOR GREEN HYDROGEN
ˆ Green Steel: In the coming years, the green hydrogen-based steel will be cost-competitive due to the declining costs of
renewable energy and electrolysers.
‒ Market restrictions on carbon-intensive steel and the provision of carbon credits will further increase the sustainability of
steel made from green hydrogen.
ˆ Transport:  Hydrogen fuel is used to power fuel cell electric cars which emit no hazardous gases.
‒ In the coming years, hydrogen fuel cell electric cars may become cost-competitive for heavy-duty vehicles with longer trip
ranges, such as buses, lorries, and other commercial vehicles.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


78
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Shipping: By using green hydrogens or their derivatives, such as green ammonia and green methanol, as fuel for propulsion
and other operations, maritime transportation and ports have a significant potential to reduce their carbon footprint.
CHALLENGES IN ADOPTION OF GREEN HYDROGEN
ˆ High Cost: The high cost of manufacturing green hydrogen using renewable energy is the most significant barrier to its
adoption in India.
‒ The green hydrogen value chain, i.e. production, storage, distribution, end-use and hydrogen compatible infrastructure
requires heavy investments.
ˆ Lack of Financial Resources: Lack of investment capacities in India is one of the prime factors slowing the adoption of green
hydrogen here.
ˆ Lack of Manpower: The green hydrogen field would require highly trained and a specialized workforce to drive a faster
adoption of the technology.
ˆ Requires Energy: The production of hydrogen in general and green hydrogen in particular requires more energy than other
fuels.
ˆ Hydrogen is a highly volatile and flammable element and extensive safety measures are required to prevent leakage and
explosions.
INITIATIVES BY GOVT OF INDIA
ˆ The National Green Hydrogen Mission: It has been approved with the initial outlay of Rs.19,744 crore. The Ministry of New
and Renewable Energy (MNRE) will be responsible for overall coordination and implementation of the Mission.
‒ Components of the Mission are:
ˆ SIGHT Programme: Under the Strategic Interventions for Green Hydrogen Transition Programme (SIGHT), two distinct
financial incentive mechanisms – targeting domestic manufacturing of electrolysers and production of Green Hydrogen will
be provided under the Mission.  
ˆ Pilot Projects: The Mission will also support pilot projects in emerging end-use sectors and production pathways.
ˆ Regions capable of supporting large scale production and/or utilization of Hydrogen will be identified and developed as Green
Hydrogen Hubs.
ˆ R&D Projects: The Mission will assist the Strategic Hydrogen Innovation Partnership (SHIP), a public-private partnership
structure for research and development.
ˆ The objectives, deadlines, and magnitude of R&D initiatives shall be appropriate for creating globally competitive technology.
ˆ Skill Development: A coordinated skill development programme will also be undertaken under the Mission.
‒ Mission Benefits:
ˆ Development of green hydrogen production capacity of at least 5 MMT (Million Metric Tonne) per annum with an associated
renewable energy capacity addition of about 125 GW in the country.
ˆ Making India a leading producer and supplier of Green Hydrogen in the world.
ˆ Creation of export opportunities for Green Hydrogen and its derivatives.
ˆ Reduction in dependence on imported fossil fuels and feedstock.
ˆ Attracting investment and business opportunities for the industry.
ˆ Creating opportunities for employment and economic development.
ˆ Green Hydrogen/Green Ammonia Policy: The Government had launched this policy with an aim to provide clean fuel to the
common people of India. This will reduce dependence on fossil fuel and also reduce crude oil imports.
‒ According to the policy:
ˆ Green Hydrogen / Ammonia manufacturers may purchase renewable power from the power exchange.
ˆ Waiver of inter-state transmission charges for a period of 25 years will be allowed to the manufacturers of Green Hydrogen
and Green Ammonia for the projects commissioned before 30th June 2025.
ˆ Initiatives by States/PSUs:
‒ Kerala Hydrogen Economy Mission: Kerala aspires to become a 100% renewable energy-based State by 2040 and net
carbon neutral by 2050.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


79
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ The Government of Kerela has constituted the Kerala Hydrogen Economy Mission to contribute strategic inputs and facilitate
partnerships towards transforming the State into a green hydrogen hub.
ˆ Kerala is also the first State in India to include hydrogen-powered mobility in its zero emissions mobility policy.
‒ Indian Oil Corporation Ltd (IOCL): As part of a decarbonization effort, IOCL aims to replace at least a tenth of the present
fossil fuel-based hydrogen at its refineries with green hydrogen.
‒ Oil & Natural Gas Corporation (ONGC): India’s state-run Oil & Natural Gas Corporation (ONGC) and joint venture partner
Greenko signed an agreement in July 2022 to invest up to US$ 6.2 billion in green hydrogen and renewable energy projects.
WAY FORWARD
ˆ India has an advantageous geographical location and the presence of an abundance of natural resources that can aid in the
production of green hydrogen.
ˆ India also benefits from low-cost renewable power and rapidly decreasing electrolyser prices.
ˆ Green hydrogen production can be made cost-effective in India by adding the necessary capacity for renewable power
generation, storage and transmission. This will enhance India’s self-sufficiency while ensuring energy security.
ˆ Green hydrogen ecosystem in India needs to be supported by proactive collaboration among innovators, entrepreneurs, and
the government.
ˆ Government’s initiatives for Green hydrogen can help India export high-value green products, making it one of the first major
economies globally to industrialise without ‘carbonising’.

INSOLVENCY IN THE AVIATION SECTOR


CONTEXT
Air Carrier Go First has filed for voluntary insolvency at the National Company Law Tribunal (NCLT).
BACKGROUND
ˆ Voluntary insolvency means that the company has accepted its business is insolvent.
ˆ It is a process in which the company says it cannot pay debts and needs help from someone to sort it out.
ˆ NCLT is a quasi-judicial authority incorporated for dealing with corporate disputes that are of civil nature arising under the
Companies Act.
INDIA’S AVIATION SECTOR
A major growth engine of India, civil aviation will drive India to become a $5 trillion economy by 2024.
ˆ Large Market Size: India has become the third-largest domestic aviation market in the world and is expected to overtake the
UK to become the third-largest air passenger market by 2024.
ˆ Economic Contribution: Indian aviation also contributed 5% of the GDP, creating a total of 4 million jobs.
ˆ Rapid Growth: Over past 6 years, India’s domestic passenger traffic has grown at a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of
around 14.5%, while international passenger traffic has increased by a CAGR of around 6.5%.
‒ India’s domestic passenger traffic is likely to rise to 16 crores in the 2023-24 fiscal year from an estimated 13.75 crore from
the previous fiscal.
‒ By 2029-30, India’s domestic passenger traffic is likely to touch 35 crore.
ˆ Infrastructure: The number of airports with civilian flights in India has grown from 74 in 2014 to 148 in 2023.
‒ Airports Authority of India (AAI has targeted a capital outlay of around Rs 98,000 crore in the airport sector across India by
2025 for constructing greenfield airports and new terminals, expanding and modernising existing terminals.
CHALLENGES FACED BY INDIA’S AVIATION SECTOR
ˆ Safety Concerns: After Covid-19 pandemic, an increasing number of technical snags and malfunctions are being reported
across leading private airlines raising serious concerns about flight safety.
ˆ Outsourcing of Components: Airlines are reported to be sourcing parts from cheap markets like Russia when parts should be
sourced from Europe.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


80
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Moreover, when the income of an airline drops, immediately the airline will cut costs on maintenance which puts the
passengers at risk.
ˆ Profitability of the Sector: Most airline operators have poor financial health which worsened during the COVID-19 pandemic
due to lockdowns and flight restrictions.
‒ Consistent losses drive down number of operators impacting competition and efficiency.
‒ For instance, in 2019-20, IndiGo was the only airline to make a profit, while all other players posted losses led by then
state-run Air India at ₹4,600 crore.

ˆ Supply Chain Issues: Delay in deliveries of aircraft, crunch in pilot availability and in cabin crew hinder the expected supply in
new capacity to meet the demand growth.
‒ Nearly 110 aircraft or 15% of India’s total fleet across four airlines — Air India, SpiceJet, GoAir, IndiGo are grounded for
want of maintenance or engine replacements.
ˆ Low Per Capita Penetration: Despite the rapid growth witnessed in the passenger traffic, its per capita penetration is still
significantly low versus global average/ peers.
‒ India is at 0.13 seats deployed per capita (domestic air travel penetration) against 0.49 for China and 0.57 for Brazil.
ˆ Poor Rural Connectivity: With mega airports controlling air and ground space, it is almost impossible to connect rural and
small towns from the large metros.
ˆ Policy Lacunae: There are many policy gaps that remain to be addressed e.g., the Aircraft Act, 1934 and Aircraft Rules, 1937
have not kept pace with modern technology in aerospace.
‒ This has increased costs to the industry and ultimately affected passenger growth.
ˆ Lack of Oversight: Numerous operational violations and deficiencies by airlines, poorly trained pilots and unlicensed airports
reflect the lack of effective regulatory oversight by Directorate General of Civil Aviation.
ˆ Insufficient Maintenance and Repair Facilities: India’s lack of large-scale maintenance, repair, and overhaul (MRO) facilities
contribute struggle of various airlines, as grounded aircraft cannot be quickly repaired and put back into service.
WHY DID GO FIRST FILE FOR VOLUNTARY INSOLVENCY?
ˆ Impact of COVID Pandemic: The Covid crisis has had a massive impact on the aviation industry and air traffic in India.
ˆ Import Dependency: India is among the top importers of crude oil, depending on foreign fuels to meet 85% of its requirements.
‒ Aviation Turbine Fuel (ATF) is one of the major petroleum products produced from processing crude oil.
‒ ATF forms 40% of the overall cost of airline companies in India.
‒ A higher price of crude oil in the international market will directly hike the ATF rates and consequently lead to high ticket
prices.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


81
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Depreciation of Indian Rupee: Indian rupee emerged as Asia’s worst performing currency in 2022 depreciating around 11.5%
against the US Dollar.
‒ Depreciation puts considerable pressure on the already high import prices of crude and raw materials.
‒ Consequently, the ATF prices hikes, high fuel costs and a weak rupee make the cost of operations unsustainable for the
airline industry.
ˆ Lack of Funds Through IPO: An Initial Public Offer (IPO) is the selling of securities to the public in the primary market. It is the
largest source of funds with long or indefinite maturity for the company.
‒ The Go First wanted to raise ₹3,600 crore since 2015 through an IPO to meet its debt repayment and working capital
requirements.
‒ However, the airline has been unable to raise funds from the primary market.
ˆ Unavailability of Aircrafts: The Go First is facing financial crunch also due to non-supply of engines by US-based jet engines
manufacturer Pratt and Whitney (P&W) that has forced grounding more than 50 planes.
ˆ Dip in Market Share: Go First had 6.9% market share in March 2023, slipping from 8.9% in 2022.
IMPLICATIONS OF INSOLVENCY
ˆ Bad Omen for Indian Aviation Sector: Go First’s bankruptcy filing would be the second in five years after Jet Airways failure in
April 2019 in the aviation industry. This trend of insolvency is not a very good sign for the Indian Aviation market.
ˆ Shares of Aviation Stocks Rise: Go First’s bankruptcy means lower competition for peers. The shares of InterGlobe Aviation
hiked 8%, SpiceJet surged about 6% while defunct airlines Jet Airways’ shares also surged 5%. This is seen as an opportunity
for other Indian airliners to grab the airline’s market share.
ˆ Fares to Soar: With Go First’s bankruptcy filing, it is expected that other airlines will benefit, leading to a 10-15% increase in
air fares on domestic leisure routes.
ˆ Opportunity for Slots: Go First’s grounding of Aircrafts also offers a chance to competitors to grab precious airport slots.
Market leader IndiGo is also expected to mount additional flights on routes where Go First had a significant presence.
ˆ Impact on Airlines Personnel: The Go First bankruptcy will have an impact on the airline stakeholders, cabin crew, pilots,
passengers and many more. However, the Indian aviation space, since it is already battling with a high demand for pilots, may
soon see viable workforce to fill these positions.
GOVERNMENT SCHEMES FOR AVIATION SECTOR
ˆ Emergency Credit Line Guarantee Scheme (ECLGS): It aims to support eligible Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises and
business enterprise in meeting their operational liabilities and restarting their businesses after disruption caused by the
COVID-19 pandemic.
ˆ Digi Yatra: Digi Yatra policy is Union Government’s initiative for providing passengers seamless and hassle-free experience at
airports without the need for verification of ticket and ID at multiple touch points.
‒ The implementation at Kolkata, Pune, Vijayawada, and Hyderabad Airports was planned by March 2023.
ˆ UDAN: Union Government’s flagship program Regional Connectivity Scheme UDAN (Ude Desh ka Aam Nagrik) aims to
enhance aviation infrastructure and air connectivity in tier II and tier III cities.
‒ The Government has allocated Rs. 1,244 crore (2023-24) for this scheme, aiming to operationalise unserved and
underserved airports, heliports and undertake development of water aerodromes.
‒ The government has also planned to develop 100 airports by 2024 under this scheme.
ˆ Greenfield Airport Policy: The greenfield airports are those which are being constructed from a scratch on the undeveloped
ground or a new site.
‒ Government of India had accorded ‘In-Principle’ approval for setting up of 21 Greenfield Airports.
‒ Out of these, 11 Greenfield airports viz. Durgapur, Shirdi, Kannur, Pakyong, Kalaburagi, Orvakal (Kurnool), Sindhudurg,
Kushinagar, Itanagar, Mopa and Shivamogga have been operationalised.
ˆ Better Policies: The Ministry of Civil Aviation in India has been encouraging States to reduce their VAT on ATF and vouched for
ATF to be brought under GST.
‒ As a result of the Ministry’s continuous efforts, 28 States charge VAT on air turbine fuel (ATF) of only 1-4%.
‒ Reduction in ATF tax rates across key States has really helped airlines keep their cost in check.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


82
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Maintenance, Repair and Overhaul (MRO) Policy: The Union Government had in 2021 introduced an MRO policy that aims to
turn India into a global hub for aircraft maintenance and overhaul, which now largely happens abroad.
‒ Accordingly, the Noida international airport shall be a major MRO hub.
‒ Under the MRO policy, companies will be entitled to subsidies for setting up operations at the Noida airport.
‒ These will be – 5% capital subsidy for those spending Rs 500 crore, 8% for investment of Rs 1,000 crore and 12% for over
Rs 1,000 crore.
ˆ NABH (Nextgen Airports For Bharat): This scheme was launched in 2018 to increase the number of Airports and their capacity
to handle traffic in India.
‒ It aims to expand airport capacity more than five times to handle a billion trips a year through investments to be made in
airport upgrade by both the private sector and the state-owned Airports Authority of India (AAI).

INDIA’S TOY ECONOMY


CONTEXT
India turning a net exporter of toys is mainly due to rising protectionism and less on account of expanding domestic capabilities.
BACKGROUND
ˆ India has recently turned a net exporter of toys, during 2020-21 and 2021-22, ending decades of import dominance.
ˆ The toy exports of India increased from $109 million (₹812 crore) to $177 million (₹1,237 crore) between 2018-19 and 2021-
22.
ˆ Amid the COVID-19 pandemic in 2020, India showed remarkable progress with the prospect of becoming a global toy hub.
INDIAN’S TOY MARKET
ˆ Rising Imports: In 2015-16, the industry had 15,000 establishments, producing toys valued at ₹1,688 crore and employed
35,000 workers.
‒ Between 2000 and 2018-19, imports rose by nearly three times as much as exports.
‒ Imports accounted for up to 80% of domestic sales until recently.
‒ Between 2014-19, the Indian toy industry witnessed negative productivity growth.

Background of Toy Manufacturing in India:


ˆ It dates back to the Indus valley civilization; five thousand years ago, when toys were introduced.
ˆ Earlier toys include whistles shaped like birds, Monkey toys, and small & large carts mostly made from natural sticks, clay, and rocks.
ˆ Due to advances in technology, currently, modern machines are used to produce modern & innovative toys.

ˆ Import from China: India imports 80% of its toys predominantly from China which means that India is being able to full fill only
20% of the domestic demand (India imports nearly US $ 600 million in toys from China).
ˆ Rising Export: However, in 2022, India’s exports of toys surged considerably and also its imports of toys, fell by 70%, signifying
a drop in India’s reliance on foreign-made toys — especially from China.
ˆ Reason Behind Rising Export: One of the major reasons behind the decline was the increase of Basic Customs Duty on the
import of toys from 20% to 60%.
‒ Non-tariff barriers were imposed as well such as production registration orders and safety regulation codes, which
contributed to import decline.
INDIA’S POLICY IN THE ASIAN SCENARIO
ˆ Promotion of Toy Exports in Asia: Historically, Asia’s successful industrialising nations promoted toy exports for job creation.
‒ It was started with Japan, China and currently Vietnam following in their footsteps.
ˆ India’s Inward Industrial Policy: However, India, followed an inward-oriented industrial policy which sheltered domestic
production by providing a double protection.
‒ India followed imports tariffs and reservation of the product for exclusive production in the small-scale sector known as
the “reservation policy”.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


83
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ As an outcome, the toy manufacturing remained stagnant, archaic and fragmented, even when imports of modern, safe,
and branded toys boomed.
PROTECTIONISM BOOSTING INDIA’S TOY EXPORT
ˆ End of Reservation Policy: In 1997, the reservation policy was abolished amid the liberal reforms.
‒ New firms entered the organised sector and productivity growth improved.
ˆ Lack of Jobs: However, the unorganised sector still languished with job losses, even as a majority of workers remained there.
ˆ Failure of Industry de-reservation: Recently, it has been found that despite early positive trends, industry de-reservation
failed to sustain output, investment, and productivity growth after 2007-08.
ˆ Low Impact of Govt Policies: Moreover, the government initiatives like Make in India have a negligible effect in strengthening
toy production and exports on a sustained basis.
‒ This is because the annual value of output and fixed investment at constant prices after peaking in 2007-08, have trended
downwards with considerable fluctuations.
‒ The output of the informal sector shrank, though it continues to account for the majority of establishments and
employment.
ˆ No Investments for Exports: The potential for sustaining net exports appears low as the industry has made no significant
sustained investment to boost output and exports.
ˆ Protectionism Driving Export Rise: The rise of export is not the outcome of strengthening domestic investment and production
on a sustained basis.
‒ India’s export surplus in toys during 2020-21 and 2021-22 was due to rise in protectionism and COVID-19 pandemic-
related global disruptions.
IMPORTANCE OF INDIA’S TOY INDUSTRY
ˆ Economic opportunities:
‒ Huge consumer base: The country has a very large young population with around half of the total population under the
age of 25, creating a large platter of potential consumers.
ˆ Some reports suggest that India’s toy market has the potential to double to $2 billion by 2025.
‒ Growing demand with the rise of the middle class: Growing demand and decreasing cost of production have resulted in a
major shift from traditional, medium- to low-end battery-operated toys, towards innovative electronic toys, and intelligent
toys.
‒ High employment generating sector: Large MSME presence in the sector has the potential to generate large employment
through artisans, small traders and MSME manufacturers.
‒ As a corollary to MSME growth, growth in the Toy Manufacturing sector in tier-II and tier-III markets has also been
witnessed.
‒ Emergence of digital marketplace: The growth of E-commerce has helped overcome logistical difficulties and has expanded
the reach of local and traditional toy markets.
‒ Growth of E-commerce has indirectly increased the export potential of local manufacturers who can now compete in the
global markets.
ˆ Societal opportunities:
‒ Growing educational toys market: Toys have an impact on the overall development of a child. E.g.: motor, psychomotor,
and cognitive skills and also stimulate creativity.
‒ Shaping the value system: Toys bring to life society’s traditions, beliefs, values, and ethos and thus can act as an agent of
propagation of ethics and progressive value systems. E.g., using dolls for breaking gender stereotypes.
‒ Increasing cultural awareness: Toys can be used to increase curiosity in histories, mythology etc. by recreating cultural
characters. E.g., the gradual movement of children from ‘Mickey Mouse’ playing cards to ‘Chota Bheem’ playing cards.
CHALLENGES IN INDIAN TOY MARKET
ˆ Availability of Foreign Toys in the Indian Market: After the liberalized economy, an inflow of cheap toys from other countries
surpassed the traditional toy market in India.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


84
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Even low-quality Chinese imports evade the Indian toy market.


‒ This results in the closure of many toy factories in India and not competing with Chinese products, primarily in electric
and electronic-based toys.
ˆ Limitations of manufacturing facilities: Poor infrastructure and the absence of end-to-end manufacturing facilities hinder the
sector’s growth.
ˆ Economies of scale issue: Toy manufacturing economies significantly depend on large production for profitability and thus
require high investment and continuous demand, which is unavailable in emerging markets like India.
ˆ Impact of Increased Import Duties There is an increase in import duty over a period from 20% to 60%. It increases the cost of
the toys in the Indian local market, resulting in the cancellation of orders.
ˆ Absence of skilled labour: Toy manufacturing requires specific skillsets which are unavailable in India’s predominantly
unskilled labour.
ˆ Fragmented market: India’s toy market is largely fragmented with limited linkages between local artisans, manufacturers and
marketing agents such as local traders.
ˆ Technological challenges: With the evolution of the gaming industry, demand for the manufacturing of digitally high-end toys
is growing. But this requires technological skillsets which are either unavailable or unaffordable to the local industry.
INITIATIVES BY THE GOVERNMENT
ˆ Indigenous toy clusters: Several Toy clusters have been approved under the Scheme of Fund for Regeneration of Traditional
Industries (SFURTI) scheme such as the Lucknow Soft toys cluster and the Wood craft cluster of Jodhpur.
ˆ National Toy Action Plan: The Government of India, by involving 15 ministries has prepared a National Toy Action Plan to
make the Indian toy industry competitive. It is a big Make in India push for domestic manufacturing of toys.
‒ The formation of the National Toy Action Plan, Vocal for Local and Make in India are likely to benefit domestic toy
manufacturers.
ˆ Product Specific Industrial Cluster Development Programme: aims to build toy clusters in dedicated SEZs to help them
become self-sustained ecosystems catering to export markets.
ˆ Other initiatives taken by the Government:
‒ First-of-its-kind Virtual India Toy Fair 2021 was organized.
‒ “Toys” is identified as one of the key sectors under Aatmanirbhar Bharat Abhiyan.
‒ Toycathon-2021 was launched to challenge India’s innovative minds to conceptualize novel toys and games based on
Indian civilization, history, culture, mythology, and ethos.
POTENTIAL SOLUTIONS
ˆ Enhancing manufacturing competitiveness by addressing the raw material issues, streamlining the GST input credit structure
and overcoming the supply chain issues.
ˆ Skilling & R&D to bridge the persistent gap in demand and supply: Development of toy design centres with a focus on R&D
to encourage innovation, incentivizing technical institutes to offer specialized courses in toy and game design and incentivizing
knowledge mobility across institutions.
ˆ Improving Ease of doing business through a one-stop shop like “National Creative Hub (C-Hub)”, improving digital preparedness
and leveraging the growing start-up ecosystem.
ˆ Tech collaboration need of the hour: Strategic relationships with global players to leverage Science, Technology, Engineering,
Art and Math toys.
ˆ Building a “Playful, Creative and Innovative Economy”: Leveraging National Education Policy 2020 to push local artisans and
promoting initiatives like toy-based tourism, Local “Toy Banks” and “Toy Library” models.
ˆ Testing and certification: Developing a standard norm and increasing the number of labs in testing and certification and
expanding geographic coverage of these labs.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


85
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

INSURANCE SECTOR IN INDIA


CONTEXT
In an ambitious bid to expand the poor insurance penetration in the country, the Insurance Regulatory and Development
Authority (IRDA) is devising a new affordable bundled product to give citizens protection against multiple risks, and seeking to
expedite claim settlements by linking death registries onto a common industry platform.
MORE ON THE NEWS
ˆ If IRDAI’s plans fructify, households
across the country could soon be
able to get an affordable single policy
that covers health, life, property and
accident, get their claims settled
within hours.
ˆ These initiatives are part of a broader
overhaul of the insurance sector
in India, with an eye on making
insurance “available, affordable and
accessible” to citizens with a ‘Gram
Sabha- to district- to State-level’
approach.
ˆ IRDAI’s overall aim is to meet the
target of providing insurance cover
for all by 2047.
ˆ With these reforms, the IRDAI is striving to create an “UPI-like moment” in insurance sector through a plan that termed as
“Bima Trinity”.
‒ Bima Sugam platform: It will integrate insurers and distributors on to one platform to make it a one-stop shop for
customers, who at a later stage can pursue service requests and settlement of claims through the same portal.
‒ Bima Vistar: It will be a bundled risk cover for life, health, property and casualties or accidents, with defined benefits for
each risk that can be paid out faster than usual without the need for surveyors.
‒ Bima Vaahaks: These Vaahaks (carriers) are women-centric workforce in each Gram Sabha to promote Bima Vistar product
in villages.
AN OVERVIEW OF INSURANCE SECTOR IN INDIA
ˆ Insurance is a legal agreement or contract between an
insured and insurer that offers protection against any kind
of loss with the latter compensating for the loss the former
has incurred.
ˆ Origins of Insurance in India: Insurance has a deep-rooted
history in India. It can be seen from the writings of Manu
(Manusmrithi), Yagnavalkya (Dharmasastra) and Kautilya
(Arthasastra). The writings mention the concept of pooling of
resources that could be re-distributed in times of calamities
and disasters such as fire, floods, epidemics and famine.
ˆ Insurance companies: The Insurance sector in India consists of total 57 insurance companies.
‒ Out of which, 24 companies are the life insurance providers and the remaining 33 are non-life insurers.
‒ Among the life insurers, Life Insurance Corporation (LIC) is the sole public sector company.
‒ There are six public sector insurers in the non-life insurance segment.
‒ In addition to these, there is a sole national re-insurer, namely General Insurance Corporation of India (GIC Re).
ˆ Market value: India Insurance market stands at $131 Bn as of FY22.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


86
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Market share: In terms of market share, the share of life insurance in total premium in India is 75.24% and the share of non-
life premium is 24.76%
ˆ Insurance penetration: India’s insurance penetration was pegged at 4.2% in FY21, with life insurance penetration at 3.2% and
non-life insurance penetration at 1%
ˆ Growth rate: The Indian insurance industry grew at a CAGR of 17% over the last two decades and is expected to continue its
commendable growth trajectory in the future years.
ˆ FDI limit: Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) in the industry under the automatic method is allowed up to 26%.
ˆ Regulator: Both the Life Insurance and the Non-life Insurance is regulated by the IRDAI (Insurance Regulatory and
Development Authority of India).
‒ It is an Autonomous body, setup in 1999, on the recommendations of R N Malhotra committee.
‒ It is tasked with the regulation of the insurance sector in India.
ˆ Global comparison: India is ranked 11th in global insurance business. India’s share in global insurance market was 1.72%
during 2020.
‒ India is ranked 10th in life insurance and 14th in non-life insurance in the world.
SIGNIFICANCE OF INSURANCE SECTOR
ˆ Providing Safety and Security: Insurance offers financial support and reduces uncertainties in both business and personal life.
ˆ Generating Financial Resources: The insurance industry collects premiums from policyholders, which are then invested in
government securities and stocks.
ˆ Encouraging Savings through Life Insurance: Life insurance encourages systematic savings as policyholders pay regular
premiums. It serves as a mode of investment and cultivates a habit of saving money.
ˆ Promoting Economic Growth: Insurance plays a crucial role in mobilizing domestic savings and turning accumulated capital
into productive investments. By doing so, it contributes to sustainable economic growth.
ˆ Providing Medical Support: Medical insurance policies cater to various health risks, offering individuals access to medical
support during medical emergencies.
ˆ Spreading of Risk: Insurance facilitates the spreading of risk from the insured individuals to the insurers. The fundamental
principle of insurance is to distribute risk among a large number of people.
GROWTH DRIVERS FOR INSURANCE SECTOR IN INDIA

CHALLENGES IN INDIA’S INSURANCE SECTOR


ˆ Huge Insurance Gap: Insurance penetration is low in comparison with global levels. Large sections of Indian population are
uninsured and hence depicts an insurance gap.
ˆ Domination of Public Sector: Although there has been a transition in the insurance sector from being an exclusive State
monopoly to a competitive market, still public-sector insurance companies hold a greater market share even though they are
fewer in number.
ˆ Budding Non-life Insurance: The share of Life insurance sector is huge (74.7%) as compared to the non-life insurance sector
(25.3%).

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


87
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Rural-Urban Divide: Rural participation of insurers remains deficient, and life insurers, especially private ones, gravitate
towards the urban population.
ˆ Capital Starved Insurers: Insurers in India lack sufficient capital, and their financial health, particularly that of the public-
sector insurers, is in a precarious state. Further, the crisis in the overall banking and the NBFCs sectors affected the growth.
ˆ Multiplicity, duplication and redundancy of government sponsored insurance schemes has resulted in the division of the risk
pool.
ˆ The ‘missing middle’ between the deprived poorer sections and the relatively well-off neither qualify under subsidized health
insurance (for poor) nor social health insurance (for organized sector) schemes.
WAY FORWARD
ˆ Promoting Awareness: There is a requirement for concerted efforts to enhance awareness and enhance financial literacy,
specifically regarding the concept of insurance and its significance.
ˆ Adopting an Inclusive Approach: Insurance companies must demonstrate a long-term commitment to rural areas and the
urban poor in order to increase insurance penetration rates. They need to develop products tailored to the specific needs of
these segments.
ˆ Harnessing Technological Advancements: An emerging example is ‘InsurTech’, which aims to simplify and enhance the
understanding of the claim process through technological innovations.
ˆ Product Innovation: Insurers should focus on developing innovative insurance products that cater to emerging risks, such as
cyber threats, climate change, and pandemics.
ˆ Collaboration with Fintech Startups: The insurance sector can leverage the expertise of fintech startups to develop innovative
distribution channels, streamline processes, and enhance customer experience.

POKHRAN TESTS AND INDIA’S NUCLEAR PROGRESS


CONTEXT
May 11, 2023 marked 25 years of Pokhran nuclear tests. In the past 25 years, India has achieved several milestones in the field
of defence, nuclear reactor capacity, and energy security.
ABOUT POKHRAN NUCLEAR TESTS
ˆ The Pokhran nuclear tests refer to a series of underground nuclear weapon tests conducted by India in May 1998 at the
Pokhran test range in the state of Rajasthan.
ˆ These tests, comprising of five detonations, were codenamed “Operation Shakti” and marked India’s second round of nuclear
tests, with the first one taking place in 1974.
ˆ The tests included both fission and thermonuclear devices, showcasing India’s capability to produce nuclear weapons.
ˆ The Pokhran tests brought India into the spotlight of global nuclear powers and had significant geopolitical implications,
shaping India’s stance on nuclear disarmament and its position as a nuclear-armed nation.
ˆ Every year since 1998, May 11 is observed as National Technology Day in India to mark Pokhran tests.
25 YEARS OF INDIA’S NUCLEAR PROGRESS SINCE THE POKHRAN TESTS

Defence ˆ According to the Federation of American Scientists (FAS), India currently has approximately 160 nuclear warheads.
ˆ India is also part of an elite group of global military powers having an operational nuclear triad capability. That
means India can launch nuclear weapons from land, air, and sea.
ˆ India has Agni, Prithvi, and K series ballistic missiles, fighter aircraft, and nuclear submarines as delivery systems
for the triad.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


88
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Rise of ˆ According to the data from PIB, in the year 2003-04 the annual nuclear power generation stood at 17,700 million
nuclear power units, in the latest year of 2021-22 it stands at 47,112 million units, which is a nearly 165 per cent increase.
generation in ˆ Nuclear energy currently accounts for around 3% of India’s total electricity generation.
India ˆ Currently, India has 22 operational nuclear reactors in the country while the government approved as many as
11 indigenous pressurized heavy water reactors in 2017 at a total cost of Rs 1.05 lakh crore and a total capacity of
7,000 Mega Watts.
ˆ Today, India is the sixth largest in the world in the number of functional reactors and the second largest in the total
number of reactors including those under construction.

Energy security ˆ The government has planned to increase the installed capacity base of nuclear power in the country for increased
for the future electricity production from nuclear power.
ˆ The present capacity of 6,780 MW would reach 13,480 MW by the year 2024-25 with the completion of projects
under construction.
ˆ The government has also accorded administrative approval and financial sanction for 12 nuclear power reactors
aggregating a total capacity of 9,000 MW, which are scheduled to be completed progressively by the year 2031. On
their completion, the total nuclear power capacity would reach 22,480 MW.

WHAT IS NUCLEAR ENERGY?


ˆ Nuclear energy is a type of energy that is generated by the process of nuclear reactions- either nuclear fission or nuclear
fusion.
ˆ The energy released during these reactions can be harnessed and used to produce electricity, heat, or other forms of energy.
ˆ Nuclear fission: It is a process in which the nucleus of an atom is split into two or more smaller nuclei, releasing a large
amount of energy in the process.
‒ This process is used in nuclear power plants to generate electricity.
‒ One example of nuclear fission is the reaction that occurs in a nuclear reactor when uranium atoms are split into smaller
atoms.
ˆ Nuclear fusion: It is a process in which two or more atomic nuclei come together to form a single, more massive nucleus,
releasing a large amount of energy in the process.
‒ This process occurs naturally in stars, including our own sun.
‒ One example of nuclear fusion is the reaction that occurs in a hydrogen bomb.

Nuclear Enrichment
ˆ Natural uranium consists of two different isotopes - nearly
99% U-238 and only around 0.7% of U-235.
ˆ U-235 is a fissile material that can sustain a chain reaction in
a nuclear reactor.
ˆ Enrichment process increases the proportion of U-235
through the process of isotope separation (U-238 is
separated from U-235).
ˆ For nuclear weapons, enrichment is required up to 90% or
more which is known as weapons-grade uranium.
ˆ Low-enriched uranium, which typically has a 3-5%
concentration of U-235, can be used to produce fuel for
commercial nuclear power plants.
ˆ Highly enriched uranium has a purity of 20% or more and is
used in research reactors.
ˆ Methods for uranium enrichment:
‒ The most common method of enrichment is through the use of centrifuges, which spin at high speeds to create a centrifugal force
that separates the isotopes based on their weight.
‒ Another method is gaseous diffusion, where uranium hexafluoride gas is forced through a series of barriers, allowing the lighter
U-235 to diffuse more rapidly and become more concentrated.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


89
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

SIGNIFICANCE OF NUCLEAR ENERGY


ˆ Low carbon emissions: Nuclear
energy is a low-carbon source
of power that does not release
greenhouse gases into the
atmosphere, unlike fossil fuels.
ˆ Reliability: Nuclear power plants
can run for long periods of time
without interruption and are highly
reliable sources of electricity.
ˆ High energy density: Nuclear fuel
contains a high energy density,
meaning that it can produce a
large amount of energy from a
small amount of fuel.
ˆ Independence from fossil
fuels: Nuclear power does not
depend on fossil fuels, which are
finite resources subject to price
fluctuations and environmental
pollution.
ˆ Base load power: Nuclear power
can provide reliable base load
power to complement intermittent
renewable energy sources like
wind and solar power.
ˆ Energy security: Nuclear power
can help to increase energy
security by reducing reliance on
foreign sources of oil and gas.
ˆ Advanced technologies: Nuclear
power research and development has led to advances in technologies like medical imaging, food irradiation, and space
exploration.
INDIA’S NUCLEAR ENERGY POTENTIAL
ˆ India has significant reserves of thorium, a naturally occurring radioactive element that can be used as a fuel in nuclear
reactors.
ˆ With the world’s largest reserves of thorium, estimated at around 360,000 tonnes, India has the potential to become a major
player in the nuclear energy sector.
ˆ In addition to thorium, India also has significant reserves of uranium (70,000 tonnes), which can be used as a fuel in nuclear
reactors.
INDIA’S THREE-STAGE NUCLEAR POWER PROGRAMME
ˆ India’s three-stage nuclear power programme was formulated by Homi Bhabha in the 1950s to secure the country’s long term
energy independence, through the use of uranium and thorium reserves found in the monazite sands of coastal regions of
South India.
ˆ The ultimate focus of the programme is on enabling the thorium reserves of India to be utilized in meeting the country’s
energy requirements.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


90
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Stage I – Pressurized ˆ The first stage of India’s nuclear program involves the use of PHWRs fuelled by natural uranium.
Heavy Water ˆ These reactors generate electricity while also producing plutonium-239 as a by-product.
Reactor [PHWR]

Stage II – Fast ˆ The second stage of India’s nuclear program involves the use of FBRs fuelled by a mix of plutonium-239 and
Breeder Reactor uranium-238.
(FBR) ˆ These reactors generate more plutonium-239 than they consume and can also convert thorium into
uranium-233, which can be used as fuel in the third stage.

Stage III – Thorium ˆ The third and final stage of India’s nuclear program involves the use of thorium-based reactors fuelled by
Based Breeder uranium-233 produced in FBRs.
Reactors ˆ These reactors are designed to use thorium as a fuel, which is abundant in India, and have the potential to
provide a sustainable source of nuclear energy for the country.

WHAT ARE THE CONCERNS ASSOCIATED WITH NUCLEAR ENERGY?


ˆ Nuclear accidents: Nuclear accidents can have catastrophic consequences, as seen in Chernobyl and Fukushima.
ˆ Radioactive waste: Nuclear power plants produce radioactive waste that remains dangerous for thousands of years and must
be carefully stored to prevent contamination.
‒ The Fukushima disaster in 2011 resulted in a significant release of radioactive materials into the environment. These
materials (nuclear waste), can remain radioactive and dangerous for thousands of years.
ˆ Limited Domestic Resources: India has limited domestic resources of uranium, which is the fuel for nuclear reactors.
‒ This has forced the country to import a significant portion of its uranium requirements, making the country’s nuclear
energy program vulnerable to global market conditions and political tensions.
ˆ Proliferation risk: The technology and materials used in nuclear power plants can be used to make nuclear weapons, making
nuclear power a proliferation risk.
ˆ High cost: Nuclear power plants are expensive to build and maintain, and the high costs can make it difficult for countries to
justify building new plants.
ˆ Security risks: Nuclear power plants and nuclear waste storage facilities can be targets for terrorism or other security threats.
ˆ Decommissioning challenges: Decommissioning nuclear power plants at the end of their useful life is a complex and costly
process that can take decades to complete.
ˆ International Sanctions: India is not a member of the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT) and has faced international
sanctions in the past for its nuclear weapons program.
‒ This has limited its access to advanced nuclear technology and fuel supplies from other countries.
ˆ Public opposition: Nuclear energy is a polarizing issue that can generate significant public opposition due to concerns about
safety and waste storage.
RECENT DEVELOPMENTS IN INDIA’S NUCLEAR LANDSCAPE
ˆ Joint Ventures with Public Sector Undertakings (PSUs): Government has also allowed Joint Ventures with PSUs to enhance
India’s nuclear program.
‒ As a result, the Nuclear Power Corporation of India Limited (NPCIL) is now in two joint ventures with the National Thermal
Power Corporation Limited (NTPC) and the Indian Oil Corporation Limited (IOCL).
ˆ Diversifying the geographical spread: In the past, India’s nuclear installations were mostly located in South India or in
Maharashtra and Gujarat in the west. However, the government is now promoting its expansion to other parts of the country.
‒ As an example, the upcoming nuclear power plant in Gorakhpur town of Haryana, which will become operational in the
near future.
ˆ Indigenization: The world’s first thorium-based nuclear plant, “Bhavni,” using Uranium-233, is being set up at Kalpakkam in
Tamil Nadu. This plant will be entirely indigenous and will be the first of its kind. The experimental thorium plant “Kamini”
already exists in Kalpakkam.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


91
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

SMALL MODULAR REACTORS


CONTEXT
Recently, the NITI Aayog published a report titled ‘the role of small modular reactors in the energy transition’.
BACKGROUND
ˆ Nuclear energy is a type of energy that is generated by the process of nuclear reactions- either nuclear fission or nuclear
fusion.
ˆ The energy released during these reactions can be harnessed and used to produce electricity, heat, or other forms of energy.
ˆ Nuclear fission: It is a process in which the nucleus of an atom is split into two or more smaller nuclei, releasing a large
amount of energy in the process.
‒ This process is used in nuclear power plants to generate electricity.
‒ One example of nuclear fission is the reaction that occurs in a nuclear reactor when uranium atoms are split into smaller
atoms.
ˆ Nuclear fusion: It is a process in which two or more atomic nuclei come together to form a single, more massive nucleus,
releasing a large amount of energy in the process.
‒ This process occurs naturally in stars, including our own sun.
‒ One example of nuclear fusion is the reaction that occurs in a hydrogen bomb.
ADVANTAGES OF NUCLEAR ENERGY

ROLE OF NUCLEAR ENERGY IN ENERGY TRANSITION ACROSS THE GLOBE


ˆ Energy transition is the process of revamping global energy systems through rapid introduction of low-emission energy
supply technologies, and aggressive penetration of non-fossil-based energy sources in the primary energy mix.
ˆ According to the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), as of April 2023, 413 nuclear power reactors with a total net
installed power generating capacity of 368 GW(e) are in operation globally, which is projected to rise to 871 GW by 2050,
more than doubling the current capacity.
ˆ The share of nuclear power generation is nearly 10% of the global electricity mix.
ˆ As per IAEA, the nuclear power has avoided the CO2 emissions of 70 Gt over the past five decades and it continues to avoid
CO2 emissions of about 1 Gt annually.
ˆ The IEA acknowledges the role of nuclear energy in energy transition. The UN Economic Commission for Europe (UNECE) has
stated that nuclear power is an “indispensable tool” for achieving the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).
VARIOUS TYPES OF NUCLEAR REACTOR TECHNOLOGIES
ˆ The nuclear industry has been developing several types of nuclear reactors with progressive increase in reactor capacity and
improvement in safety features, performance, and economics.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


92
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ At present, nuclear power reactors of various types are in operation like PWRs, BWRs, PHWRs, FBRs, HTGRs etc.
‒ Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR): They use enriched uranium as fuel and employ water as both coolant and moderator.
‒ Boiling Water Reactor (BWR): BWRs are similar to PWRs but differ in their design. In BWRs, the water in the primary circuit
boils directly due to heat generated by fission.
‒ Pressurized Heavy Water Reactor (PHWR): They use heavy water (deuterium oxide) as both the coolant and moderator.
‒ Fast Breeder Reactor (FBR): It is a type of nuclear reactor that uses fast neutrons to sustain the nuclear chain reaction.
‒ High-Temperature Gas-Cooled Reactor (HTGR): It is a type of nuclear reactor that uses helium gas as a coolant and
graphite as a moderator.
ˆ Among the various reactor types, PWRs are at the top with more than 300 operating reactors in the world at present.
EMERGENCE OF SMALL MODULAR REACTORS (SMRS)
ˆ Roots of SMRs can be traced back to 1940s-1950s when small capacity nuclear reactors of various designs were used for
military purposes.
ˆ As per the IAEA, the SMRs are advanced nuclear reactors with a power generation capacity ranging from less than 30 MWe
to 300+ MWe.
ˆ SMRs are:
‒ Small – physically a fraction of the size of a conventional nuclear power reactor.
‒ Modular – making it possible for systems and components to be factory-assembled and transported as a unit to a location
for installation.
‒ Reactors – harnessing nuclear fission to generate heat for electricity production or direct application.
ˆ Many countries have active national programmes dedicated to SMR design and technology development with a view to
deploy them by 2035 with extensive global cooperation.
ˆ SMR designs can be categorised into six types based on the basic nuclear technology employed in the design:
‒ Land-based water-cooled SMRs: This category includes SMRs that use water as a coolant and moderator, following the
principles of pressurized water reactors (PWRs) commonly found in large nuclear power plants.
‒ Marine based water cooled SMRs: SMRs in this category include the water-cooled SMR designs for deployment in a
marine environment. This can be achieved in the form of floating units installed on barges or ships.
‒ High temperature gas-cooled SMRs: SMRs from this category can provide very high temperature heat of more than 750
degrees Celsius and thereby higher efficiency in electricity generation.
‒ Liquid metal-cooled fast neutron spectrum SMRs (LMFRs): SMRs in this category include designs based on fast neutron
technology with different coolant options including helium gas and liquid metal coolants like sodium, lead and lead-
bismuth.
‒ Molten Salt Reactor SMRs (MSRs): SMRs in this category are based on molten fluoride or chloride salt in the role of
coolant.
‒ Microreactors (MRs): MRs are very small SMRs designed to generate electrical power typically up to 10 MW(e). Different
types of coolant, including light water, helium, molten salt and liquid metal are adopted by microreactors.
KEY FEATURES AND BENEFITS OF SMALL MODULAR REACTORS (SMRS)
ˆ Size and Portability: SMRs are smaller and more compact than conventional reactors, allowing for easier transport, installation,
and scalability.
ˆ Enhanced Safety Features: SMRs incorporate advanced safety features to ensure the protection of the public and the
environment. These features include passive cooling systems, advanced control mechanisms, and robust containment
structures.
ˆ Flexibility and Grid Resilience: Their smaller size and modular nature make them suitable for deployment in remote areas or
as a supplement to existing power grids, enhancing grid resilience.
ˆ Reduced Capital Costs: The modular design of SMRs allows for standardized manufacturing processes, potentially reducing
construction costs.
ˆ Potential for Decentralization: SMRs offer the potential for decentralized power generation, allowing communities or
industries to have their own local sources of electricity.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


93
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Integration with Renewable Energy: SMRs can complement renewable energy sources, such as solar and wind, by providing
baseload power and maintaining grid stability during periods of low renewable generation.
CHALLENGES ASSOCIATED WITH SMRS
ˆ Technology choice issue: Many SMR technology alternatives are available at present with varying requirements of supply
chains, regulation, operations, etc. For large scale commercial deployment of SMRs, the technology choice needs prioritization.
ˆ Supply chain issues: As with big LWRs (Light Water Reactors), the supply chain is an important factor in SMR competitiveness.
Supply chains for the SMR industry may need consolidation in order to capitalize on economies of scale, as witnessed in the
aviation industry.
ˆ Safeguards challenges: In most countries, novel SMR technologies will require the application of international safeguards,
potentially requiring the development of novel or customized technical measures that demand time and resources, typically
in collaboration with the relevant governments and industry.
ˆ Potential disadvantages: SMRs also produce radioactive waste from spent fuel and require spent fuel storage & disposal
facilities. Apart from the technological and cost aspects of such a requirement, this requirement can also lead to socio-political
resistance.
ˆ Public perception and engagement: Nuclear power has faced traditional opposition due to the potential consequences of a
nuclear disaster, notwithstanding the low likelihood of such events.
WAY FORWARD
ˆ Technology Development and Demonstration: Continued research and development efforts are necessary to refine and
optimize SMR designs. Prototyping and testing of SMR modules are crucial steps in validating their performance and safety.
ˆ Cost Optimization and Standardization: Achieving cost competitiveness is essential for the widespread adoption of SMRs.
Standardization of designs, components, and manufacturing processes can help drive down production costs through
economies of scale and improved quality control.
ˆ Regulatory Harmonization and Safety Assessment: Regulatory frameworks need to be adapted or developed to address the
unique characteristics of SMRs. This includes updating safety assessment methodologies to consider multi-module designs
and emergency planning zones.
ˆ Skilled Workforce Development: Ensuring a skilled workforce across the value chain of SMR development, construction, and
operation is vital.
ˆ Strategic Partnerships and Collaboration: Collaboration among national laboratories, research institutions, private companies,
and government departments is crucial for technology development, safety assessments, regulatory harmonization, and
research coordination.
ˆ Consensus Building and Stakeholder Engagement: Engaging relevant stakeholders, such as communities, environmental
organizations, and industry representatives, through transparent communication and participatory processes can help foster
acceptance and support for SMR projects.

THE ECONOMICS OF CLIMATE CHANGE IN INDIA


CONTEXT
Reserve Bank of India (RBI)’s recently published ‘annual report on currency and finance’ includes a chapter explaining climate
change’s macroeconomic effects.
WHAT IS CLIMATE CHANGE?
ˆ Climate change refers to long-term shifts and alterations in the Earth’s climate patterns, including changes in temperature,
precipitation, wind patterns, and other aspects of the climate system.
ˆ It is primarily driven by human activities, particularly the burning of fossil fuels (such as coal, oil, and natural gas), deforestation,
and industrial processes, which release greenhouse gases (GHGs) into the atmosphere.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


94
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

WHAT IS THE EVIDENCE OF CLIMATE CHANGE IN INDIA?


ˆ Anomalies in temperature: While annual average temperature in India has been increasing gradually, the rise has been
significantly sharper during the last vicennial (twenty years) than during any other 20-year time interval since 1901 finds the
RBI report.
ˆ Anomalies in precipitation: Similarly, the south west monsoon, too, has been becoming more erratic.
‒ While the average annual rainfall in India increased during 2000-2020 compared to 1960-1999, the long-term trend since
1901 indicates a gradual decline in annual rainfall.
‒ Moreover, evidence suggests that while dry spells have become more frequent during the last several years, intense wet
spells have also increased, finds RBI’s research.
ˆ Natural disasters: Research about natural disasters since 1975 has shown that India is relatively more exposed to floods and
storms (i.e., cyclones and hailstorms) than droughts and heatwaves.
HOW VULNERABLE IS INDIA TO CLIMATE CHANGE?
ˆ The Global Climate Risk Index 2021 had ranked India seventh
in the list of most affected countries in terms of exposure
and vulnerability to climate risk events.
ˆ There are two ways of analyzing India’s vulnerability to
climate change. One by looking at India’s geographical
attributes and the other by looking at the structure of India’s
economy.
ˆ Geographical features: India’s diverse topography is not
only exposed to different temperature and precipitation
patterns, but also makes it vulnerable to extreme weather
events posing wide-ranging spatial and temporal implications
for the economy.
ˆ Economic structure: India’s sectoral composition of GDP is
skewed towards services sector, which is globally considered
to be emission-light with relatively lower energy intensity of
output.
‒ The services-led growth path since 1980s was associated
with a declining trajectory in overall CO2 emissions
growth for about twenty years till early 2000s.
‒ There was a brief episode of acceleration in CO2
emissions growth which took place between 2004-05
to 2009-10, which could be attributed to the spurt in
manufacturing activity observed during that period.
‒ CO2 emissions growth started decelerating around 2011-
12 and followed a declining trajectory again during the
decade of 2010s.
WHAT IS THE MACROECONOMIC IMPACT OF CLIMATE CHANGE ON INDIA?
ˆ Climate change can adversely impact both the supply side as well as the demand side. It can stroke inflation, reduce economic
output, trigger uncertainty and change consumer behaviour.
ˆ Typically, the risks from climate change are categorised in two main ways.
‒ Physical risks: These include chronic issues (such as a gradual and sustained change in temperature and precipitation) as
well as acute events such as extreme weather occurrences).
‒ Transition risks: Simply put, these refer to economy-wide changes arising from the transition towards a low-carbon
economy.
9 This is best encapsulated by a paradox called “success is failure”. This phrase was used by Mark Carney, Governor of
the Bank of England, in 2016.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


95
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

9 Carney meant that if the shift towards becoming a low-carbon economy is too rapid, it could materially damage a
country’s financial stability.

ˆ Over the years, there have been several predictions and assessments made about the impact of climate change on India’s
economy. Some are listed below:
‒ According to NITI Aayog in 2019, around 600 million of India’s population are facing severe water stress, with 8 million
children below 14 years in urban India at risk due to poor water supply.
‒ The World Bank in 2020 said that India could account for 34 million of the projected 80 million global job losses from heat
stress associated productivity decline by 2030.
‒ The IPCC Working Group in 2022 stated that India is one of the most vulnerable countries globally in terms of the population
that would be affected by the
sea level rise. By the middle of
the present century, around 35
million people in India could
face annual coastal flooding,
with 45-50 million at risk by the
end of the century.
CAN POLICIES PROVIDE SOME
SOLUTIONS?
ˆ The Network of Central Banks
and Supervisors for Greening the
Financial System (NGFS) have
created an analytical framework
called the National Institute Global
Econometric Model (NIGEM) “to
produce policy insights”.
ˆ In this model, the researchers
looked at how GDP growth rate
and inflation would be affected
under six different policy stances

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


96
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

when compared to the baseline (which is the best-case scenario involving no impact of climate change). Details of the six
policy stances are shown in the image.
ˆ Impact on GDP: The report said that policy actions have a negative impact on India’s GDP no matter what. However, global
scenarios of “current policies” and “nationally determined contributions (or NDCs)” have the highest negative impact on
output, whereas rapidly moving towards Net Zero by 2050 will contain the hit to GDP.
ˆ Impact on inflation: Moving towards net zero by 2050 will spike inflation far more in the immediate future than continuing
on current policies.
ˆ Overall, these trade-offs will become sharper as India tries to achieve the twin goals of achieving net zero emissions by 2070
and becoming an advanced economy (which implies higher emissions) by 2047.

TRANSITIONING AWAY FROM LIBOR


CONTEXT
Recently, the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) has advised banks and other RBI-regulated entities to ensure complete transition away
from the London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR) from July 1.
WHAT IS LIBOR?
ˆ LIBOR, stands for the London Interbank Offered Rate, is the benchmark interest rate at which major global banks lend to one
another.
ˆ It was established in 1986 and is administered by the Intercontinental Exchange (ICE), which asks major global banks how
much they would charge other banks for short-term loans.
ˆ LIOBOR is calculated for five major currencies for seven different maturities, the three-month U.S. dollar rate being the most
common.
‒ Those five major currencies include the US dollar, Euro, British Pound, Japanese Yen, and Swiss Franc.
‒ The rates are published daily by the ICE and reflect the borrowing costs of banks.
USES OF LIBOR
ˆ Lenders, including banks and other financial institutions, use LIBOR as the benchmark reference for determining interest rates
for various debt instruments.
ˆ It is also used as a benchmark rate for mortgages, corporate loans, government bonds, credit cards, and student loans in
various countries.
ˆ Apart from debt instruments, LIBOR is also used for other financial products like derivatives including interest rate swaps or
currency swaps.
HOW LIBOR IS CALCULATED?
LIBOR is determined through a daily rate-setting process based on submissions from a panel of major banks in London. The
following steps outline the general methodology:
1. Selection of panel banks: The ICE, which administers LIBOR, selects a panel of major banks that meet specific criteria. These
banks are typically active participants in the London money market and have a significant volume of transactions.
2. Rate submissions: Each panel bank submits its estimated borrowing costs for various currencies and maturities to ICE.
3. Trimming outliers: ICE eliminates the highest and lowest submissions for each currency and maturity to exclude any extreme
or unrepresentative rates.
4. Calculation methodology: ICE calculates LIBOR for each currency and maturity by taking the trimmed arithmetic mean (average)
of the remaining submissions.
5. Publication: Once the calculations are completed, ICE publishes the LIBOR rates for different currencies and maturities around
11:55 a.m. London time.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


97
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

WHY IS LIBOR USED AS A BENCHMARK RATE GLOBALLY?


ˆ Historical acceptance: London has historically been a leading global financial center with a deep and liquid interbank market.
As a result, LIBOR became a representative benchmark for the cost of short-term borrowing in the international banking
system.
ˆ Wide range of currencies and maturities: LIBOR is available in various currencies and different maturities, ranging from
overnight to one year. This broad coverage allowed it to be used as a reference rate.
ˆ Simplicity and ease of use: LIBOR is a readily available and widely published benchmark rate, making it convenient for market
participants to reference and calculate interest rates based on it.
WHAT ARE THE CONTROVERSIES AROUND LIBOR?
ˆ Rate manipulation: One of the most significant controversies surrounding LIBOR was the revelation that some panel banks
had manipulated their submissions to manipulate LIBOR rates.
‒ The phenomenon was particularly on display during the 2008 financial crisis when submissions were artificially lowered
(amid the crisis).
‒ In 2012, Barclays admitted to the misconduct and agreed to pay $160 million in penalties to the U.S. Dept of Justice.
‒ The Wall Street Journal too had studied in May 2008 that several panelists were paying “significantly lower borrowing
costs” than what other market measures were suggesting.
ˆ Lack of underlying transactions: LIBOR’s determination relied on estimated borrowing costs provided by banks rather than
actual transactions.
ˆ Limited oversight and transparency: The governance and oversight of LIBOR were criticized for being insufficient. The
rate-setting process was relatively opaque, and the methodology used by panel banks to make their submissions was not
transparent.
ˆ Inadequate reform: Following the rate manipulation scandal, there were calls for reforms to address the shortcomings of
LIBOR. Efforts were made to strengthen LIBOR. However, critics contend that the reforms fell short in ensuring reliability and
robustness.
WHAT ARE THE ALTERNATIVES FOR LIBOR?
ˆ In the transition away from LIBOR, alternative reference rates, such as the Secured Overnight Financing Rate (SOFR) in the
United States and the Sterling Overnight Index Average (SONIA) in the United Kingdom, are being developed and promoted
as replacements.
‒ SOFR is based on transactions in the U.S. Treasury repurchase market and reflects the cost of borrowing secured by
Treasury securities.
‒ SONIA is based on actual overnight unsecured transactions in the sterling market of the U.K.
ˆ Accordingly, in India, new transactions were to be undertaken using the SOFR and the Modified Mumbai Interbank Forward
Outright Rate (MMIFOR), replacing MIFOR.
ˆ The goal is to establish more robust and transparent benchmarks that are based on actual market transactions.

US DEBT CEILING CRISIS


CONTEXT
With the ongoing U.S. debt ceiling crisis, finance leaders of the Group of Seven (G7) nations warned for further global economic
uncertainty.
BACKGROUND
ˆ On January 19, 2023, the United States hit its debt ceiling limit of $31.4 trillion, leading to a debt-ceiling crisis.
ˆ Recently, the U.S. Treasury Secretary has notified the U.S. Congress that the country could default on its debt as early as June
1, 2023 if the White House does not reach a consensus to raise or suspend the debt ceiling.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


98
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

WHAT IS THE ‘US DEBT CEILING’?


ˆ It refers to the maximum amount of money that the United States government is authorized to borrow to fund its operations
and meet its financial obligations.
ˆ It is a legal limit set by Congress on the total amount of outstanding debt that the government can accumulate.
ˆ The debt ceiling was established by the US Congress in 1917 during World War I to make the federal government fiscally
responsible.
WHAT HAPPENS WHEN THE GOVERNMENT REACHES BEBT CEILING?
ˆ When the government reaches the debt ceiling, it cannot legally borrow any more funds to cover its expenses.
ˆ At that point, the Treasury Department must employ various measures, known as “extraordinary measures,” to continue
financing the government’s operations without surpassing the debt limit.
ˆ These measures can include reallocating funds from other areas, suspending certain government investments, or using
accounting techniques to create additional headroom.
ˆ If the debt ceiling is not raised or suspended by Congress, the government may face difficulties in meeting its financial
obligations, potentially leading to a default.
ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF THE DEBT CEILING

Advantages Disadvantages

ˆ Holds the nation’s finances in check ˆ Can be easily raised, encouraging fiscal irresponsibility
ˆ Can be used to fund federal operations ˆ Lowers the U.S. credit rating and increases its cost of debt
ˆ Improves efficiency in the government’s ability to fund ˆ Controversy over whether the debt ceiling is constitutional
obligations including Social Security and Medicare benefits

WHAT HAPPENS IF THE DEBT CEILING ISN’T RAISED?


ˆ The most severe consequence of not raising the debt ceiling is the risk of a default by the United States government.
ˆ When the government reaches the debt ceiling, it means it can no longer borrow money to meet its financial obligations,
such as paying its debts, Social Security benefits, government salaries, and other critical expenses.
ˆ A default on these obligations would have severe consequences for the economy and financial markets, both domestically
and globally.
IMPLICATIONS OF US DEFAULTS ON ITS DEBT

Domestic ˆ Higher borrowing costs: Following a default, the United States would face higher borrowing costs to finance its debt.
implications Higher borrowing costs can dampen investment, discourage borrowing, and hinder economic growth.
for US ˆ Economic recession: The uncertainty and disruptions caused by a default would undermine consumer and business
confidence, leading to reduced spending and investment. Government spending would need to be drastically cut,
potentially resulting in layoffs, reduced public services, and a contraction in economic activity.
ˆ Social and political consequences: The cuts in government spending could affect healthcare, education, and social
welfare. This could lead to public dissatisfaction and political tensions.

Global ˆ Economic slowdown: A US default would have ripple effects on the global economy. Export-oriented countries heavily
implications reliant on US demand would be particularly affected.
ˆ Financial market contagion: A US default would send shockwaves through global financial markets. Financial institutions
around the world that hold US Treasury bonds would suffer losses, affecting their balance sheets and potentially leading
to financial instability globally.
ˆ Currency implications: A US default could undermine confidence in the US dollar as the global reserve currency. This
could encourage global de-dollarization efforts.
ˆ Geopolitical repercussions: It could diminish the United States’ credibility and influence in international affairs, while
other countries and blocs may seek to assert themselves on the global stage.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


99
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

PAST INSTANCES OF US DEBT CEILING CRISIS


ˆ The US government debt has increased under every single president since 1929, resulting in the debt ceiling being raised
over 100 times, with occasional instances of suspension that have contributed to crisis-like situations.
ˆ In 2011: The US reached a crisis point of near default on public debt and suspended the rise in the limit. The delay in raising
the debt ceiling led to its first downgrade in the US credit rating, a sharp drop in the stock market, and an increase in
borrowing costs.
ˆ Another one in 2013: This time when the ceiling was reached again, the Treasury adopted extraordinary measures to delay
a default. These measures included suspending investments in individual retirement funds of federal employees, the Civil
Service Retiree’s and Disability Fund, the Postal Service Retiree Health Benefits Fund, etc.
ˆ That apart, the debt ceiling was suspended in 2015, 2017, and 2019, but in all these years it was upwardly revised post a few
months of suspension.
DOES INDIA HAVE A DEBT CEILING MECHANISM?
ˆ India does not have a formal debt ceiling mechanism similar to the one in the United States.
ˆ The Indian government manages its borrowing and debt obligations through various measures, including fiscal discipline,
budgetary controls, and oversight by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI).
ˆ In India, the government’s borrowing activities are governed by the provisions of the Fiscal Responsibility and Budget
Management (FRBM) Act, which sets targets for fiscal deficits and debt-to-GDP ratios. The FRBM Act aims to ensure prudent
fiscal management and fiscal discipline by the government.

ARMED FORCES (SPECIAL POWERS) ACT (AFSPA)


CONTEXT
The Assam Chief Minister reiterated that the Armed Forces Special Powers Act (AFSPA) is likely to be lifted completely from the
State by the year-end as law and order had improved considerably.
DECODING THE NEWS
ˆ The AFSPA grants special powers to the armed forces,
including the authority to make arrests and conduct
searches without warrants, as well as use force without
permission from a magistrate.
ˆ AFSPA law has already been withdrawn from one district
of Assam, and within the limits of four police stations
(Wangoi, Leimakhong, Nambol and Moirang) in Manipur.
ˆ A few days back, the law was withdrawn from the
jurisdiction of three police stations in the Wokha and
Zunheboto districts of Nagaland, while one police station
in Arunachal Pradesh — Chowkham — was declared a
“Disturbed Area” under the Act.
ˆ According to Mr. Sarma- Assam CM, the improved law
and order situation in Assam has paved the way for the
potential withdrawal of AFSPA.
ˆ He also mentioned that retired Army personnel would
be appointed as Additional Superintendents of Police
to provide training to the state’s police force and also
expressed the intention to replace Central police forces
with Assam police battalions and emphasized the
involvement of military personnel in training the police
force.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


100
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

WHAT IS ARMED FORCES SPECIAL POWERS ACT, 1958?


ˆ Origin: The Act in its original form was promulgated by the British in response to the Quit India movement in 1942.
‒ After Independence, the act was retained, first brought in as an ordinance and then notified as an Act in 1958.
ˆ Objective: The act provides certain special powers to armed forces members operating in disturbed areas in the State of
Arunachal Pradesh, Assam, Manipur, Meghalaya, Mizoram, Nagaland and Tripura.
‒ It is enforced by the Ministry of Home Affairs.
ˆ Reasons for imposition:
‒ Tackle secessionist movements: The north-eastern states of Nagaland, Mizoram, Assam, Manipur etc. witnessed a rise in
secessionist activities, aiming to break away from India.
‒ The law aimed to overcome these movements by giving extraordinary powers to the armed forces.
‒ Naga movement: The initial aim of the AFSPA was to overcome the Naga movement. The law was passed in Parliament,
and subsequently imposed on the entire state. It was subsequently extended to other disturbed areas.
ˆ Disturbed Area: A disturbed area is declared under Section 3 of the AFSPA.
‒ An area can be disturbed due to differences or disputes between members of different religious, racial, language or
regional groups or castes or communities.
‒ The Union Government or the Governor of the State or administrator of the Union Territory can declare the whole or part
of the State or Union Territory as a disturbed area.
ˆ Powers under AFSPA:

Judicial committees to review AFSPA:


ˆ The Justice Verma Committee: The committee aimed to review the laws against sexual assault. It mentioned how the Armed Forces
Special Powers Act legitimizes the immunity against sexual violence against women.
ˆ The Justice Jeevan Reddy Committee: The committee observed that the law had become “a symbol of oppression, an object of hate
and an instrument of discrimination and high headedness. It had suggested that the act should be repealed.
ˆ Justice Hegde Commission: The commission observed that there was a lack of enforceable safeguarding rights at the root level against
the “sweeping powers” given to the armed forces.

‒ Firing: The armed forces and the Central Armed Police Forces deployed in specified “disturbed areas” can fire and kill
anyone acting in accordance of law.
‒ Arrest and detention: Arrest anyone based on suspicion, without a warrant.
9 Individual arrested and taken into custody under this act has to be handed over to the officer in charge of the nearest
police station.
‒ Search: Security forces can search any premises without a warrant. They can stop and search any vehicle based on
suspicion.
‒ Protection from prosecution: Security forces are given protection from prosecution and legal suits. The Central
government’s sanction is required for prosecution.
‒ Destruction: Destroy any arms dump, hide-outs, fortified shelter from which armed attacks are carried out.
‒ Judicial review: There shall not be any judicial review of the government’s judgment on why an area is found to be
disturbed.
ˆ Amendments:
‒ The act was amended in 1972 to give powers to the Central government, along with the States, to declare an area as
“disturbed”.
‒ Based on the mandate, the Home Ministry issues periodic “disturbed area” notification, to extend AFSPA for the states
of Nagaland and Arunachal Pradesh.
‒ The notification for extending AFSPA in Manipur and Assam is issued by the respective State governments.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


101
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Success of AFSPA
ˆ Decline in extremist incidents: Compared to 2014, there has been a 76% reduction in the extremist incidents in the year 2022.
ˆ Decline in fatalities: Deaths of security personnel and civilians have reduced by 90% and 97% respectively during this period.
ˆ Decline in areas under imposition: The improvement in security situation has allowed Disturbed Area notification under the AFSPA to
be completely withdrawn from Tripura in 2015 and Meghalaya in 2018.

SIGNIFICANCE OF AFSPA ACT


ˆ Effective Counter-Insurgency: The fighting capability of the militants in the North-East and J&K has improved considerably.
‒ Hence, with the powers given by AFSPA, the armed forces have been able to protect the borders of the country for
decades.
ˆ Operational Hurdles: The Armed Forces are required to operate in hostile terrain, facing an unfriendly population environment
exposing themselves to grave dangers.
ˆ Legal Battles: Working under a challenging environment requires a protective law otherwise the forces get embroiled in legal
battles and their effectiveness is reduced.
ˆ Effective Law and Order: The provisions of the AFSPA are invoked only when the State Government is unable to maintain
peace and tranquility.
CRITICISM OF AFSPA
ˆ Alienating people of north-east: The use of force to overcome popular movements has further alienated people of north-
east.
‒ Many families have lost their loved ones to military actions. People of the region feel alienated from India.
ˆ Violation of human rights: India’s judicial organs and other international groups have described AFSPA as a symbol of
oppression.
‒ There are widespread instances of extended custody and torture by the security forces. Innocents have suffered under
the draconian law.
ˆ Misuse by armed forces: Security forces have used the law for their own personal benefits. There were instances of them
carrying out kidnapping and extortion under the protective veil of AFSPA.
ˆ Encroaching upon the powers of the state governments: Security personnel operating in AFSPA areas work parallel to the
state security forces. Their actions sometimes encroach upon the jurisdiction of state security agencies.

Incidents of misuse of AFSPA law


ˆ The Mon incident
‒ Armed Forces fired upon a group of civilians returning from work in 2021, assuming they were members of the banned outfit NSCN
(K).
‒ Civilians lost their lives owing to the firing but Armed Forces Personnel responsible for the incident were not charged due to
immunity under AFSPA.
ˆ The Malom Incident
‒ In 2000, 10 civilians waiting at the bust stop were killed by the 8th Assam Rifles at Malom town, near Imphal’s Tulihal airport. It was
alleged to be a fake encounter.
‒ Following the incident, Irom Sharmila went on a hunger strike, demanding complete withdrawal of AFSPA.
ˆ Tinsukia Fake encounter
‒ In 1994, 18 Punjab regiment picked up nine youths from their homes following the death of a Tea estate manager, who was allegedly
killed by members of ULFA.
‒ Following a Habeus Corpus petition, 4 of them were released while the rest of them were shot dead in a remote location.

MANIPUR INSURGENCY
CONTEXT
Violent clashes have recently broken out at various places in Manipur during the course of a ‘Tribal Solidarity March’ by the All
Tribal Students’ Union of Manipur (ATSUM).

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


102
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

UNDERSTANDING THE INSURGENCY


Merger of Manipur with the Union of India
The merger of Manipur with India took place through a process that was marked by negotiations, agreements, and ultimately,
the signing of the Merger Agreement.
ˆ Before 1947: Manipur was a princely state under British colonial rule. The Maharaja of Manipur, Bodhachandra Singh, was
the ruler of the state.
ˆ 1947: India gained independence from British colonial rule. The British withdrew from India, and the various princely states
were given the choice to join either India or Pakistan or remain independent.
ˆ August 1947: The Maharaja of Manipur signed the Instrument of Accession, agreeing to accede to the Indian Union.
ˆ June 1948: The state of Manipur held an election based on universal adult franchise, and a constitutional monarchy was
established.
ˆ September 1949: The Government of India pressured the Maharaja of Manipur into signing the Merger Agreement, which
effectively merged Manipur with the Indian Union.
ˆ 21st January 1972: Manipur, along with Meghalaya and Tripura, became a full-fledged state under the North Eastern Region
(Reorganisation) Act, 1971.
ETHNICITY OF MANIPUR
ˆ The Meiteis are the largest community in Manipur. There are 34 recognized tribes, which are broadly classified as ‘Any Kuki
Tribes’ and ‘Any Naga Tribes’.
ˆ The central valley in the state accounts for
about 10% of the landmass of Manipur, and
is home primarily to the Meitei and Meitei
Pangals who constitute roughly 64.6% of the
state’s population.
ˆ The remaining 90% of the state’s geographical
area comprises hills surrounding the valley,
which are home to the recognized tribes,
making up about 35.4% of the state’s
population.
WHO ARE THE MEITEIS?
ˆ Meiteis are the dominant community of
Manipur, found majorly in Imphal plains.
They can also be found in the states
of Assam, Tripura, Nagaland, Meghalaya,
and Mizoram. Some of them reside in
Myanmar and Bangladesh.
ˆ Religious affiliation: A majority of them identify as Hindu, while about 8% are Muslim.
ˆ Language: They speak the Meitei language, which is officially known as Manipuri. It belongs to the Tibeto-Burman language
family.
‒ Manipuri was included in the Eighth Schedule of the Indian Constitution in 1992.
ˆ Art and Culture:
‒ Maliyafam Palcha Kumsing is the traditional calendar of the Meitei community, which has 12 months and a 7-day week,
like the Gregorian calendar.
‒ The classical Manipuri dance form has its roots from the Lai Haraoba dance form.
‒ Martial art form Tang-ta originated from Meitei Knights.
‒ Sagol Kangjei, which is the earliest form of modern-day Polo, traces its origin to Manipur and Meiteis.
‒ Mukna Kangjei is a type of traditional wrestling popular amongst the Meiteis.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


103
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

MEITEI’S DEMAND FOR ST STATUS


ˆ Recent Plea:
‒ There was a recent plea before the Manipur High Court by the Meetei (Meitei) Tribe Union, seeking directions to the
Manipur government to submit a recommendation to the Union Ministry for Tribal Affairs for the inclusion of the
community in the list of Scheduled Tribes in the Indian Constitution, as a “tribe among tribes in Manipur”.
ˆ Arguments in Favour:
‒ “Tribal” Status pre-independence: In their plea before the High Court, the petitioners argued that the Meitei community
was recognised as a tribe before the merger of the princely state of Manipur with the Union of India in 1949, and that it
lost its identity as a tribe after the merger.
‒ To preserve their culture: It was also argued that the demand for ST status arose from the need to “preserve” the
community, and “and save the ancestral land, tradition, culture and language” of the Meiteis.
‒ Constitutional Safeguard: There has also been an organised push in support of this demand since 2012, led by the
Scheduled Tribes Demand Committee of Manipur (STDCM).
9 The STDCM stated that because of being left out of the ST list, “the community has been victimised without any
constitutional safeguards to date.

Hill Areas Committee (HAC)


ˆ HAC is the highest decision-making body in Manipur at the legislative level to oversee the planning, implementation and monitoring
of all development activities in the hill areas.
ˆ HAC is constituted under the Manipur Legislative Assembly (Hill Areas Committee) order, 1972. It comprises of all MLAs elected from
the hill areas of the State as its members.
ˆ Powers: Manage resources, sanitation services and primary education, public health and undertake administrative and welfare services
including development and economic planning.

‒ Decline in Population: It claimed that the Meitein/Meetei have been gradually marginalised in their ancestral land and
that their population which was 59% of the total population of Manipur in 1951 has now been reduced to 44% as per 2011
Census data.
ˆ Meitei community members had also filed contempt proceedings against the Hill Areas Committee (HAC) of the Manipur
Assembly for passing a resolution opposing their inclusion under Scheduled Tribe (ST).
MANIPUR HIGH COURT’S RULING
ˆ The court directed the government to consider the inclusion of the Meetei/Meitei community in the tribe list of Manipur.
ˆ It observed that the petitioners and other groups have been fighting for a long time for this inclusion, suggesting that it is an
important issue for the community.
ˆ The court has directed the government to submit its recommendation after considering the case of the petitioners, preferably
within four weeks of receipt of the order.
REASONS FOR OPPOSITION BY OTHER TRIBAL GROUPS
The demand for ST status for the Meitei community has long been opposed by the state’s tribal groups.
ˆ Dominance of Meiteis: One of the reasons cited for the opposition is the dominance of the Meiteis, both in population and
in political representation, since 40 out of 60 Assembly constituencies of the state are in the valley.
ˆ Risk of Job Opportunities: The ST communities of Manipur have been consistently opposing to the inclusion of fearing the loss
of job opportunities and other affirmative actions granted to STs by the Constitution of India to a much advanced community
like the Meitei.
ˆ Academically Advanced Groups: The tribal groups say the Meiteis have a demographic and political advantage besides being
more advanced than them academically and in other aspects.
ˆ Other arguments: These include the fact that:
‒ the Manipuri language of the Meiteis is included in the Eighth Schedule of the Constitution and
‒ that sections of the Meitei community which is predominantly Hindu are already classified under Scheduled Castes (SC)
or Other Backward Classes (OBC), and have access to the opportunities associated with that status.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


104
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

OTHER REASONS FOR THE INSURGENCY


ˆ Another major reason for the discontent has been the state government’s notices claiming that 38 villages in the
Churachandpur-Khoupum Protected Forest area (in Churachandpur and Noney districts) are “illegal settlements” and that its
residents are “encroachers”.
ˆ Following this, the government set out on an eviction drive claiming that the people living there “were encroaching reserved
forests, protected forests and wildlife sanctuaries for poppy plantation and drugs business”which resulted in clashes.
ˆ Kuki groups have claimed that the eviction is a violation of Article 371C, which confers some administrative autonomy to the
tribal-dominated hill areas of Manipur.

The criteria for ST status


ˆ The criteria for ST status are primitive traits, distinctive culture, backwardness, geographical isolation, and shyness of contact with the
large community.
The Process of Inclusion in the ST List:
ˆ The process of adding tribes to the ST list starts with a recommendation from the State governments.
ˆ It is sent to the Tribal Affairs Ministry, which reviews and sends them to the Registrar General of India, Under the Home Ministry for
approval.
ˆ After approval, it is sent to the National Commission for Scheduled Tribes and then sent to the Cabinet for a final decision.
ˆ Once the cabinet finalizes it, then it introduces a bill in the parliament to amend the Constitution (Scheduled Castes) Order, 1950, and
the Constitution (Scheduled Tribes) Order, 1950.
ˆ After the amendment bill is passed by both the Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha, the President’s office takes the final decision under
Articles 341 and 342 of the Constitution:
Benefits in the Inclusion in the ST List:
ˆ Some of the major benefits include post-matric scholarship, overseas scholarship and the national fellowship, besides education,
concessional loans from the National Scheduled Tribes Finance and Development Corporation, and hostels for students.
ˆ In addition, they will also be entitled to benefits of reservation in services and admission to educational institutions as per the
government policy.
Status of Scheduled Tribes in India:
ˆ As per Census-1931, Schedule tribes are termed as “backward tribes” living in the “Excluded” and “Partially Excluded” areas. The
Government of India Act of 1935 called for the first time for representatives of “backward tribes” in provincial assemblies.
ˆ The Constitution does not define the criteria for recognition of Scheduled Tribes and hence the definition contained in 1931 Census
was used in the initial years after independence.
ˆ However, Article 366(25) of the Constitution only provides process to define Scheduled Tribes: “Scheduled Tribes means such tribes
or tribal communities or parts of or groups within such tribes or tribal communities as are deemed under Article 342 to be Scheduled
Tribes for the purposes of this Constitution.”
ˆ 342(1): The President may with respect to any State or Union Territory, and where it is a State, after consultation with the Governor, by a
public notification, specify the tribes or tribal communities or part of or groups within tribes or tribal communities as Scheduled Tribe
in relation to that State or Union Territory.
ˆ The Fifth Schedule of the Constitution lays out provision for Administration and Control of Scheduled Areas and Scheduled Tribes.
ˆ The Sixth Schedule deals with the administration of the tribal areas in Assam, Meghalaya, Tripura and Mizoram.

IMPORTANCE OF NE REGION AND STEPS TO CURB NE INSURGENCY


Northeast region of India is strategically important for India in several ways:
ˆ National Security: The region shares a long international border with neighboring countries like China, Myanmar, Bhutan,
Bangladesh, and Nepal. Therefore, the region’s strategic location is significant for India’s national security.
ˆ Economic Importance: The Northeast region is rich in natural resources such as oil, natural gas, coal, limestone, and forests,
and has great potential for tourism and exports. The region is also known as the “growth engine” of India due to its economic
potential.
ˆ Carbon Sink: The dense forest cover of the Northeast region plays an important role in mitigating climate change as a carbon
sink. The region’s forests absorb a significant amount of carbon dioxide, thus helping in reducing the carbon footprint.
ˆ Act East Policy: The Northeast region has the potential to act as the Indian ‘Gateway to Southeast Asia’ under India’s Act East
Policy. The region’s proximity to Southeast Asian countries could provide new economic opportunities for India.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


105
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Cultural Diversity: The Northeast region is home to various ethnic groups and has a rich cultural heritage. The region’s unique
cultural identity is an important part of India’s diverse culture and heritage.

STEPS TO CURB INSURGENCY FOR A


SECURE NORTH EAST
ˆ Addressing the root causes of insurgency:
It is important to address issues such as
unemployment, poverty, discrimination, lack of
infrastructure, and basic amenities in the region
to prevent the emergence of new insurgent
groups.
ˆ Dialogue with insurgent groups: The
government should initiate a dialogue with the
insurgent groups to understand their demands
and find a peaceful solution to their grievances.
ˆ Strengthening intelligence and security
operations: Effective intelligence gathering and
security operations can help prevent insurgent
groups from carrying out attacks.
ˆ Repeal of AFSPA: The controversial Armed
Forces Special Powers Act (AFSPA) should be
repealed to improve the human rights situation
in the region.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


106
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Encourage people’s participation: The government should encourage the participation of the people of the region in the
decision-making process to promote a sense of ownership and belonging.
ˆ Strengthening the legal system: The government should ensure that the legal system is fair and transparent to avoid the
abuse of power by security forces. The Assam Rifles and the Indian Army since independence have been working towards
creating a peaceful environment for the civil government to function.
ˆ Strengthening ties with neighboring countries: Strengthening economic and diplomatic ties with neighboring countries can
help promote regional stability and security.

WOMEN IN ARMED FORCES


CONTEXT
For the first time in the history of the Army, women from the Officers Training Academy (OTA) will be inducted into the Army’s
Regiment of Artillery.
BRIEF BACKGROUND OF WOMEN IN INDIAN ARMED FORCES

CURRENT STATE OF WOMEN IN INDIAN ARMED FORCES


ˆ There are 9,118 women currently serving the army, navy and air force.
ˆ Women comprise only 3.8% of the Indian army (world’s second-largest
army) - compared to 13% of the air force and 6% of the navy.
ˆ All branches of the Indian Armed Forces have women in combat roles.
Women are allowed in combat services and supervisory roles (as
officers).
ˆ As of 2020, three officers have the rank of lieutenant-general or
equivalent, all in the Medical Services.
ˆ In May 2021, 83 women were inducted as Jawans for the first time in the
Indian Army, in the Corps of Military Police.
ˆ Global comparison:
‒ Israel: Israel is known for its high representation of women in the
armed forces. As of 2021, women comprise about 33% of the Israeli
Defense Forces (IDF), including combat roles in the air force, navy, and infantry.
‒ United States: The United States is considered a pioneer and a trend-setter as regards induction of women in the services.
There are approximately 200,000 American women on active duty in the US armed forces. They constitute nearly 20
percent of its strength.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


107
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Britain: Today, 71% of all jobs in the Navy, 67% in the Army and 96% in the Air Force are tenable by women. Women are
primarily excluded from the duties which require battling enemy at close quarters.
WHAT ARE THE ADVANTAGES OF WOMEN JOINING THE ARMED FORCES?
ˆ Ability vs Gender: Gender should not be a factor in the recruitment of military personnel, as long as the applicant meets the
required qualifications, and many women are in better shape than many men sent into combat.
‒ In modern high technology battlefield, technical expertise and decision-making skills are increasingly more valuable than
physical strength.
ˆ Breaking Gender Stereotypes: Women joining the armed forces can help to break down gender stereotypes and promote
gender equality. This can have a positive impact on society as a whole, encouraging greater respect for women and their
abilities.
ˆ To uphold Right to Equality: Articles 14, 15, 16 and 19 of the Constitution, which uphold the values of equality and allow
equal, non-discriminatory opportunities at work, were being violated by denying eligible women the opportunity.
ˆ Military Readiness: Allowing a mixed gender force keeps the military strong. The armed forces are severely troubled by falling
retention and recruitment rates. This can be addressed by allowing women in the combat role.
ˆ Diversified talent pool: The inclusion of women in the armed forces increases the recruitment pool, allowing for a more
diverse and representative military.
ˆ Leadership: Women encourage participation and share power and information as they have learnt this since their childhood,
and yet are ruthless when the situation demands.
ISSUES ASSOCIATED WITH WOMEN IN ARMED FORCES

Physical issues ˆ Physical Ability: The standards of physical fitness have been set to suit men, and women attempting to overcome
them could create biological hurdles.
ˆ Feasibility: While integration of women into combat is possible for those qualified, which is a small number versus
the additional logistical, regulatory and disciplinary costs associated with integration may make integration of women
a less feasible affair.

Social issues ˆ Low acceptance: Both male and female prisoners are at risk of torture and rape. There is low acceptance in societies
to abuse woman prisoners of war by enemy.
ˆ Family imbalance: Centre said that armed forces require sacrifices and commitment beyond the call of duty by the
entire family of service personnel involving separation and frequent transfers, affecting the education of children and
career prospects of the spouse.

Administrative ˆ Morale & Cohesion: Having women serving in direct combat may hamper mission effectiveness by hurting unit
issues morale and cohesion as the mindset of an average soldier on the ground remains averse to having a woman leader.

Prominent examples of women in Indian armed forces


ˆ Gunjan Saxena - She is a former IAF officer who became the first woman to fly in a combat zone during the 1999 Kargil War between
India and Pakistan.
ˆ Padmavathy Bandopadhyay - She became the first woman Air Marshal of the Indian Air Force in 2004.
ˆ Bhawana Kanth – In 2016, she became the first women to be inducted into the fighter stream of the Indian Air Force (IAF).
ˆ Tania Shergill - She became the first woman Parade Adjutant for the Republic Day parade in 2020, leading an all-male contingent of the
Indian Army.

CONCLUSION
With future war fighting becoming more sophisticated and technologically advanced, there is a growing need to tap into the
large pool of skilled women and ensure that they are represented across all ranks of the armed forces. To achieve this goal, it is
essential to promote the concept of meritocracy, whereby individuals are selected based on their capabilities rather than their
gender.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


108
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ENVIRONMENT

FOREST FIRES
CONTEXT
An inquiry into the forest fires incident in Goa has indicated natural causes as the main reason for the incident.

Stats IQ: Forest fires in India


ˆ Council of Energy, Environment and Water (CEEW):
‒ According to this public policy think tank, there is a tenfold increase
in forest fire incidents over the past two decades.
‒ More than 62% of Indian states are vulnerable to high-intensity
forest fires. These include Andhra Pradesh, Odisha, Madhya
Pradesh, Maharashtra, Chhattisgarh, Uttarakhand, Telangana, and
the Northeastern states.
‒ Among all states, Mizoram has witnessed the highest incidence of
forest fires over the last two decades. About 95% of its districts are
forest fire hotspots.
ˆ India State of Forest Report (ISFR):
‒ More than 36% of India’s forest cover is vulnerable to frequent
forest fires, 6% is ‘very highly’ fire-prone, and almost 4% is
‘extremely’ prone (2021 report).
‒ The normal season of forest fires extends from November to June, and majority of fires are caused by man-made factors.
‒ Madhya Pradesh saw the highest number of fire incidents, followed by Chhattisgarh, Maharashtra, Odisha and Andhra Pradesh,
between November 2021 and June 2022.
ˆ A FSI study also found that nearly 10.66% area under forests in India is ‘extremely’ to ‘very highly’ fire prone.

WHAT ARE FOREST FIRES?


ˆ Forest fires, also known as bush fires or wildfires, are an
unplanned, uncontrolled and unpredictable fire in an area
of combustible vegetation.
ˆ Forest fires are both natural and man-made. They are
sometimes a way of regulating native vegetation, animals,
and ecosystems.
ˆ Various reasons for occurrence of forest fires:
‒ Natural causes:
9 Lightning strikes: Lightning strikes on trees can
trigger forest fires. Studies have found that such
incidence of lightning strikes have increased due to
climate change.
9 Volcanic eruption: The extreme heat of lava, as a
result of volcanic eruption, may cause vegetation to
catch fire and spread, resulting in a forest fires.
9 Friction between trees or rocks: Rubbing of trees
with each other may generate sparks that can easily
ignite dry grasses. Similarly, falling of rocks may
trigger sparks to cause forest fires.
9 Spontaneous combustion: Prolonged dry spell, followed by unprecedented high temperatures and low humidity can
make vegetation so dry that sun rays can also trigger fires.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


109
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Anthropogenic causes:
9 Agriculture expansion: Slash and burn agricultural practice is one of the main reasons for spread of forest fires across
the world.
9 Poaching: Poachers in many parts of the world use fires to catch animals. Such fires many intensify and turn into forest
fires.
9 Recreation: Smoking and campfires have the capability to trigger forest fires. Studies have found that cigarette residue
is the main cause of man-made forest fire.
9 Electric spark: Overhead electric cables may sometimes burn as a result of overheating. This can trigger fires in areas
where vegetation is already dry.

Connection between climate change and forest fires


ˆ Global warming: Climate change and global warming has increased temperatures, leading to longer dry spells. This facilitates drying of
vegetation, making them vulnerable.
ˆ Decline in duration of rainy season: Even though the intensity of rains has increased, it is concentrated within a short period. Increase
in dry season has allowed vegetation to turn into tinder box.
ˆ Increase in lightning: Studies have indicated that there will be more frequent incidences of lightning due to climate change. Such
lightning incidents can trigger forest fires.
ˆ Heatwaves: Heatwaves incidents have drastically increased across the world because of climate change. Heatwave conditions are
optimal for forest fire incidents.

TACKLING FOREST FIRES


ˆ Controlled burning: Vulnerable areas must be mapped and preemptively burnt in a controlled manner. This will save larger
areas that may have been burnt in case of forest fires.
ˆ Water buffers: Water channels must be constructed within large parcels of vulnerable land (especially grasslands and shrubs)
to prevent spread of fires.
ˆ Awareness creation: Forest dwelling communities must be sensitized about the effects of intentional burning. Reducing
human-caused ignitions may be the most effective means of reducing unwanted wildfire.
ˆ Stringent laws: Stringent laws must be introduced that penalizes intentional forest fires. This can act as a deterrent against
such actions.

Forest Fire Management under National Forest Policy


ˆ The policy aims to prepare a strong data base / network on forest fires and evolve an appropriate method to deal with the forest fire
situation in more effective manner.
ˆ Under the policy, an Early Warning Fire Forecasting System utilizing satellite data and Fire Danger Rating System for early detection
of forest fire has been introduced.
ˆ Some actions suggested under the policy:
‒ Preventive actions: A preventive program consisting of zoning, danger rating, early warning and real time monitoring must be
developed and implemented.
‒ Inter-agency coordination: Forest department needs to coordinate with National Remote Sensing Agency, Forest Survey of India,
the Meteorological Department, the All India Radio and the State-owned television to plan their actions in the fire season.
‒ Increase vigilance: Vigilance must be increased in vulnerable areas. For that adequate number of firewatchers must be appointed.
‒ Communication network: Accessibility to vulnerable areas must be enhanced so as to enable quick transport of human and
materials from one area to another.
‒ Awareness campaign: An awareness campaign involving schools, Joint Forest Management (JFM) committees, NGOs and other
groups must be initiated to handle fire damage, prevention, detection and communication and suppression.
‒ Training: Training must be provided to fire managers, including trainers at JFM unit levels. This will empower them to take effective
actions during forest fires.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


110
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

GREENWASHING
CONTEXT
The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) will be joining 12 international regulators in the Global Financial Innovation Network (GFIN)’s first-
ever Greenwashing TechSprint to develop a tool to help regulators and the market effectively tackle the risks of greenwashing in
financial services.
MORE ON THE NEWS
ˆ The Global Financial Innovation Network (GFIN) is a group of international regulators that aims to foster innovation in the
financial services sector while ensuring consumer protection and market integrity.
ˆ The TechSprint is a collaborative effort that brings together international regulators, firms, and innovators to address
sustainable finance as a collective priority.
ˆ The RBI is taking this initiative of joining the sprint to address the growing concern of greenwashing in the financial sector.
ˆ As the number of investment products marketed as
“green” grows, so does the risk of false or misleading
claims being made about the Environmental, Social,
and Governance (ESG) credentials of these products.
ˆ This can harm consumer and investor confidence in
the financial sector and undermine the credibility of
sustainable finance as a whole.
WHAT IS GREENWASHING?
ˆ Greenwashing is defined as a growing tendency among
firms and governments to label certain activities
as climate-friendly, which would lead to emissions
reduction, or avoidance of emissions.
ˆ There have been instances where developed countries
greenwash their normal business investments
in developing countries, or their bilateral aid, by
highlighting climate co-benefits of the financial flows,
sometimes with very little justification.
ˆ For example, a 2021 European Commission report found
that 42% of green claims made by organizations were
deceptive or exaggerated in some way.
HOW IS GREENWASHING DONE?
ˆ Use of catchy terms: Greenwashing is
done through inconsistent use of terms
‘net-zero’, ‘net-zero aligned’, ‘eco-
friendly’, ‘green’ and ‘ecological’ but
are not accompanied with satisfactory
evidence to substantiate their claims.
ˆ Hiding in small text: Companies tend to
hide information about environmentally
unsound practices in small text to deceive
the reader.
ˆ Cherry-picking data: Companies cherry-
pick data from research to highlight green
practices while obscuring others that are
harmful.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


111
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Scientific jargons: Companies use terms and jargons that can only be understood by experts. This allows them to masquerade
their practices as environment friendly.
WHY DO WE SEE AN INCREASING TREND OF GREENWASHING?
ˆ Environment consciousness: Environmentally aware and conscious customers are increasingly exploring planet-friendly,
recyclable and sustainable ‘green’ products.
‒ They are ready to pay more for a product that is environmentally sustainable.
ˆ Profit maximization: As customers are becoming environmentally conscious, companies have found that they could make
more money out of a product by labeling it ‘environment-friendly’.
ˆ Brand value boosting: Many corporations use greenwashing to improve public perception of their brands. This will give them
market recognition.
EXAMPLES OF GREENWASHING
ˆ Volkswagen scandal: In Volkswagen scandal, the German car company was found to have been cheating in emissions testing
of its claimed green diesel vehicles. This was a case of greenwashing.
ˆ Palm oil company claims: Multinational palm oil company of Indonesia had claimed that palm oil plantations provide home
to flora and fauna. In reality, palm oil plantations contribute to deforestation.
ˆ Save the Towel: During a stay in Fiji, Environmentalist Jay Westerveld came across notes next to towels in a particular resort,
asking customers to reuse the towels and help reduce ecological damage to the ocean and the coral reefs.
‒ While it appears to be an environmentally-friendly practice, in reality, the intention was for the hotel to save up on
laundry bills.
ˆ Made of Bamboo: Retailers Kohl and Walmart were fined $5.5 million for misleading customers about their home furnishing
products being made of bamboo.
‒ In reality, they were made of rayon, which is made from cellulose whose manufacturing requires the use of harmful
chemicals such as sodium hydroxide that are hazardous to the environment.
ˆ Coca-Cola campaign: Coca –Cola was accused of greenwashing after promoting its new line of the low-sugar version, Coca-
Cola Life, as a “green, healthy alternative”.
ˆ “Reef safe” sunscreens: Several of Banana Boat’s “reef safe” sunscreens contain harmful chemicals that negatively impact
coral reef environments.
IMPACT OF GREENWASHING
ˆ Boost carbon-emitting business: Greenwashing enhances the image of the entity, sometimes even helping them boost their
business.
‒ Consumers are more likely to unknowingly buy a product or service that is highly polluting, being unaware of its negative
environmental impacts.
ˆ Pushing towards disaster: Greenwashing presents a false picture of the progress made on climate change front. People
believe the same and their lack of action pushes the world towards disaster.
ˆ Expensive: Apart from misleading users on the climate front, entities use greenwashing to increase the price of products, by
labeling them environment friendly. Consumers are forced to pay higher prices.
ˆ Brand degradation: If the claim of greenwashing is proved to be false, the brand value of the company will seriously be
affected.
‒ Ex: Emission scandal negatively affected the brand value of Volkswagen motors.
ˆ Promote bad practices: The false label of environment-friendly can promote bad disposal or usage practice among the
consumers.
‒ Ex: False label of bio-degradable can promote practice of unscientific disposal of plastic by consumers.
COMBATING GREENWASHING
ˆ Regulating/monitoring entity: There must be authorized entities that monitor/verify claims made by private companies or
governments about their climate-friendly actions. This will ensure that claims are made only after due study.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


112
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Skepticism: Users expressing skepticism about the climate-friendly products can force companies to take additional studies
to prove that their products are genuinely climate-friendly.
ˆ Making the entire value-chain eco-friendly: Private entities must work towards reducing emissions across their entire value
chain and not limit their efforts to only one part of the chain.
ˆ Carbon credit buying: Companies emitting greenhouse gases and later buying carbon credits for balancing must not be
allowed to claim their products as environment friendly.
ˆ Compulsory disclosures: Entities must transition from voluntary disclosures (relating to net emissions) to compulsory
disclosure. This will increase transparency and curb the practice of greenwashing.
WAY FORWARD
ˆ Corporate ethics: Companies and corporate entities must desist from greenwashing practices as it blatantly violates corporate
ethics.
‒ Apart from directly impacting environment, greenwashing will exploit human sentiments.
ˆ User awareness: Users and customers must not fall for greenwashing practices without looking at relevant proof. This can
deter entities from using such tactics.
ˆ Government responsibility: Government must take responsibility for curtailing practices of greenwashing. Regulation of ‘eco-
friendly’ claims and stringent punishment for wrong claims must be implemented.
India’s First Water Body Census
CONTEXT
The Ministry of Jal Shakti has released the report of India’s first water bodies census.
INDIA’S FIRST WATER BODIES CENSUS
ˆ The Census: The Union Government earlier maintained a database of water bodies that were getting central assistance under
the scheme of Repair, Renovation and Restoration (RRR) of water bodies.
‒ In 2016, a Standing Committee of Parliament pointed to the need to carry out a separate census of water bodies.
‒ Consequently, the census was launched under the centrally sponsored scheme, “Irrigation Census” in convergence with
the 6th Minor Irrigation Census in order to have a comprehensive national database of all water bodies.
ˆ Aim: The census’s objective was to develop a national database with information on the size, purpose, ownership, status, and
conditions of water bodies. It covered all natural and human-made units bounded on all sides for storing water, irrespective
of condition or use.
NEED FOR WATER BODY CENSUS
ˆ Water Crisis in India: India is facing a water crisis with groundwater decline, biodiversity loss, and climate change increasing
the frequency of floods and droughts. In this regard, water bodies are important.
ˆ Water Bodies as Buffer: They provide a buffer against climate variability, holding flood waters for use in dry periods.
ˆ Food & Water Security: Water bodies contribute to food and water security as well as livelihoods by recharging groundwater
and providing water for irrigation and livestock.
ˆ Cultural Importance: Water bodies also have cultural and ecological significance.
ˆ Water Bodies Getting Damaged: However, water bodies are increasingly under threat from pollution, encroachment,
urbanisation, and drying. If they are to be conserved and managed effectively, action plans are needed which require baseline
data.
ˆ Uniform Data Required: Since water bodies are managed by different agencies from State to local to private entities, the data
must be uniform and easily accessible.
‒ To actually manage water bodies, contextual and traditional knowledge of communities is needed which are to be
integrated with formal data.
ˆ No Data on Smaller Bodies: While data on reservoirs and rivers has been available on the India Water Resources Information
System (WRIS), there has been no data on smaller water bodies that are the lifeline of rural India and critical cultural, flood-
control and recreational spaces in cities.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


113
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

KEY OBSERVATIONS BASED ON DATA CENSUS


ˆ Small Waterbodies: Most water bodies in India
are very small and the vast majority of India’s
water bodies are less than one hectare large.
Consequently, locating and keeping track of
them is likely to remain a challenge.
‒ The traditional way to map these water
bodies, using satellites, may not work,
which is why this census in ground-based
tracking is very welcome.
ˆ Regional Pattern: The water bodies show
regional patterns that correlate with rainfall.
‒ In drier States like Gujarat, Maharashtra,
and Rajasthan, water bodies tend to be
larger and publicly held.
ˆ The water bodies are primarily used for
irrigation and groundwater recharge.
‒ In the wetter States, like Kerala, West
Bengal, and States in the northeast, more
than three-quarters of the water bodies are privately owned.
ˆ The water bodies are used for domestic use and pisciculture dominate. Mid-sized water bodies are largely panchayat-owned.
ˆ Lack of Repair: Most water bodies have never been repaired or rejuvenated.
‒ Several water bodies were classified “not in use”, meaning despite the recent interest in rejuvenating water bodies, most
of them have never been repaired or revived.
GOVERNMENT SCHEMES FOR WATER CONSERVATION
ˆ Atal Bhujal Yojana (ATAL JAL): It is being implemented as a Central Sector Scheme in water stressed Gram Panchayats in
Gujarat, Haryana, Karnataka, Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, Rajasthan and Uttar Pradesh for five year period (2020-25).
‒ It also aims at bringing about behavioral change at the community level through awareness programs and capacity building
for fostering sustainable ground water management.
ˆ Pradhan Mantri Krishi Sinchayee Yojana (PMKSY): It aims to enhance physical access of water on farm and expand cultivable
area under assured irrigation, improve on-farm water use efficiency, introduce sustainable water conservation practices, etc.
ˆ Repair, Renovation & Restoration of Water Bodies: This is a Centrally sponsored scheme and a component of PMKSY. Under
the scheme, financial assistance is being provided to the State Governments for renovation, repair and restoration of identified
water bodies.
ˆ National Water Policy (2012): Formulated by the Ministry of Jal Shakti ,this policy advocates conservation, promotion and
protection of water and highlights the need for augmenting the availability of water through rain water harvesting, direct use
of rainfall and other management measures.
ˆ Jal Jeevan Mission (JJM): It aims to connect more than 193 million rural households with functional household tap water
connections by 2024.
‒ The budget for this scheme is INR 3600 billion which makes it one of the largest welfare programmes in the world.
‒ JJM is being implemented as a decentralized, demand-driven community-managed programme.
ˆ Namami Gange Programme: Under this, a comprehensive set of interventions such as wastewater treatment, solid waste
management, river front management (ghats and crematoria development), e-flow, afforestation, biodiversity conservation
and Public Participation etc. have been taken up for rejuvenation of river Ganga and its tributaries.
ˆ National Water Mission: It aims to ensure integrated water resource management helping to conserve water, minimize
wastage and ensure more equitable distribution both across and within States.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


114
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

SHORTCOMINGS IN THE CENSUS


ˆ Exclusion of Ecological Functions: Fish and birds feed on water bodies and these water bodies also provide roosting and
breeding gaps spaces for resident and migratory birds.
‒ The census does not address issues related to these ecological functions and focuses only on human use, which means
only pisciculture or fish farming, which is seeded and does not reflect natural biodiversity.
ˆ Lack of Coverage: The census questionnaire does not include eutrophication, sewage pollution, and solid waste dumping as
possible reasons for abandonment or disuse of water bodies in few States.
ˆ Inconsistencies in the Census: The census groups water bodies into five types: ponds, tanks, lakes, reservoirs, and water
conservation schemes.
‒ However, these categories are not mutually exclusive. Many tanks that were traditionally used directly for irrigation serve
primarily as recharge structures today.
‒ Based on the data, it appears that in Karnataka, these were classified as ponds and tanks serving the purpose of irrigation,
whereas in Maharashtra these were classified as water conservation structures, primarily serving the purpose of
groundwater recharge.
‒ The sources of irrigation statistics for the two States suggest neither State has much tank irrigation.
ˆ Lack of Data Standarisation: The data was not standardised across States. Some States like Gujarat do not show any water
bodies not being in use, whereas Karnataka reports almost 80% of its water bodies as being in a state of disuse. This suggests
differences in interpretation by the enumerators.
‒ Moreover, the map for north Karnataka seems empty. Since the original geotagged data does not seem to have been
made available yet, it is unclear if some districts were skipped or if they genuinely had a lower water-body density.
SIGNIFICANCE OF INDIA’S FIRST WATER BODIES CENSUS
ˆ Assessment of Water Bodies: Water bodies are essential for Indian agriculture, drinking water, absorption of flood water
and ground water recharge. Therefore, it is essential to assess where freshwater resources exist and how people can play
important role in conservation of these water bodies for healthy and sustainable development.
ˆ Provide Information Regarding Water Trading: There are instances of water from bore wells being sold and bought at farm
level, but specific reports are not available.
‒ The census may provide an opportunity to get ground information on this aspect and provide insights into farm level water
trading.
‒ The information will be relevant to State Governments involved in farm level irrigation and water management.
ˆ Revealed Disparities and Encroachment: The census has highlighted the disparities between rural and urban areas and issues
related with varying levels of encroachment.
ˆ Gap Between Demand and Supply of Water: Water is an important aspect for development which it is linked with every
Sustainable Development Goal.
‒ Water is a recyclable resource but its availability is limited and the gap between the supply and demand is widening over
time.
‒ Therefore, concerted efforts are needed to conserve and preserve water bodies.
ˆ Facilitate Water Management in India: From being a water abundant country, India is gradually progressing towards water
scarcity due to increasing population pressure and urbanization.
‒ At present, India is sustaining 18% of world population with only 4% of global water resources.
‒ Therefore, management of water resources has assumed great importance.
ˆ Better Implementation of Schemes: Information obtained from the Census will be highly useful in implementation of schemes
like Atal Bhujal Yojana and g Pradhan Mantri Matsya Sampada Yojana.
ˆ Framing of Policies: This Census will aid in laying down policy guideline and programmes for the development, conservation
and management of water as a national resource.
WAY FORWARD
ˆ The first water body census provides high-level indications on the way forward by detailing ownership, state of use, and the
costs of construction and repair.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


115
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ It points to how and why water bodies must be restored, which agency’s capacities need to be strengthened, where and how
much funds are needed, and who will benefit from such efforts.
ˆ If such censuses are conducted every five or 10 years, over time, they will accurately represent emerging trends and the state
of water in the country as a whole.

STATE OF INDIA’S ENVIRONMENT REPORT 2023


CONTEXT
State of India’s Environment Report 2023 has been released by non-profit Centre for Science and Environment.

Topics covered ˆ Topics ranging from climate change, agriculture and industry to water, plastics, forests and biodiversity have
been covered in the report.

Water body ˆ More than 30,000 water bodies in the country have been encroached.
encroachment

Municipal solid ˆ About 150,000 tonnes of municipal solid waste is generated in India every day. More than half of it is either
waste dumped in landfills or remains unattended.

Effects of air ˆ Four years and 11 months is the average lifespan lost to air pollution in India.
pollution on ˆ Compared to urban India, rural India is losing more years due to air pollution-related health issues.
lifespan

Extreme weather ˆ India has witnessed extreme weather events on 271 days. These events have claimed over 2,900 lives.
events

SDG performance ˆ Global rank in meeting the UN sustainable development goals (SDGs) of India has slipped by nine places.
ˆ India’s ranking is lower than its four South Asian neighbors namely, Bangladesh, Bhutan, Sri Lanka, and Nepal.

Cases of ˆ Environmental cases have remained unaffected. Courts need to decide on 245 cases every day to clear the
Environmental backlog.
crimes

Agriculture and ˆ There is a strong evidence of efficacy of traditional and regenerative farming methods.
forests ˆ Despite loss in forest areas, there is a positive trend of communities demanding their rights over forests, and
these rights are being granted.

Plastic waste ˆ The issue of plastic waste remains relevant but cities are becoming more knowledgeable about waste
management, segregating waste at the source, minimizing plastic usage, and transforming waste into valuable
resources.

UNEP REPORT ON PLASTIC POLLUTION


CONTEXT
A recent report ‘Turning off the Tap: How the world can end plastic pollution and create a circular economy’ has been released
by United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP).
MORE ON NEWS
ˆ This report outlines the magnitude and nature of the changes required to end plastic pollution and create a sustainable
circular economy that is friendly to humans and the environment.
ˆ Plastic pollution is the buildup of plastic objects and particles in the environment (like bags, plastic containers, and microbeads)
that harms wildlife, natural and wildlife habitats, and mankind.
‒ It is most visible in developing Asian and African nations, where garbage collection systems are often inefficient.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


116
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

WHAT IS CIRCULAR ECONOMY?


ˆ The circular economy is a model of production and consumption, which involves sharing, leasing, reusing, repairing,
refurbishing and recycling existing materials and products as long as possible. In this way, the life cycle of products is extended.
ˆ The circular economy is an alternative to traditional linear economies, where we take resources, make things, consume
them and throw them away.
‒ This way of living uses up finite raw materials and produces vast quantities of waste.
ˆ Circular Economy is based on three principles:
‒ Eliminate waste and pollution;
‒ Circulate products and materials (at their highest value);
‒ Regenerate nature.

BENEFITS OF CIRCULAR ECONOMY


ˆ Protect the Environment: Reusing and recycling products slows down the use of natural resources, reduces landscape and
habitat disruption and helps to limit biodiversity loss.
‒ It also helps to reduce greenhouse gas emissions.
ˆ Reduce Raw Material Dependence: The global demand for raw materials in increasing with rising population. However, the
supply of crucial raw materials is limited.
‒ Recycling raw materials mitigates the risks associated with supply, such as price volatility, availability and import
dependency.
‒ This especially applies to critical raw materials, needed for the production of technologies that are crucial for achieving
climate goals, such as batteries and electric engines.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


117
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Create Jobs and Save Consumers Money: Moving towards a more circular economy could increase competitiveness, stimulate
innovation, boost economic growth and create jobs.
‒ Redesigning materials and products for circular use would also boost innovation across different sectors of the economy.
‒ Consumers will be provided with more durable and innovative products that will increase the quality of life and save them
money in the long term.
KEY HIGHLIGHTS OF THE REPORT
ˆ Currently, world produces 430 million metric tons of plastics each year of which over two-third are short lived products.
ˆ Plastic could emit 19% of global greenhouse gas emissions allowed under a 1.5°C scenario by 2040 and production is set to
triple by 2060 if “business-as-usual’ continues.
ˆ Global plastic pollution can reduce by 80% by 2040 if countries and companies make policy shifts to a circular economy.
ˆ Countries need to eliminate unnecessary and problematic plastic uses. They need to make three market shifts: reuse, recycle,
and reorient and diversify.
‒ Reuse: Promoting reuse options, including refillable bottles, bulk dispensers, deposit-return-schemes, and packaging
take-back schemes, can reduce 30% of plastic pollution by 2040. To realize its potential, governments must help build a
stronger business case for reusables.
‒ Recycle: Reducing plastic pollution by an additional 20% by 2040 can be achieved if recycling becomes a profitable venture.
There is a need to discontinue the fossil fuel subsidies that help make new plastic products cheaper, which disincentivizes
recycling and the use of alternative materials.
‒ Reorient and diversify: The use of appropriate alternative materials for single-use products, such as wrappers and sachets
including switching to compostable materials that more easily break down could reduce plastic pollution by 17%.

ˆ Cutting plastics by 80% would save 0.5 billion tons of planet-warming carbon pollution a year, and could also create 700,000
new jobs by 2040 in the developing countries.
ˆ Tackling plastic waste requires stricter standards for non-recyclable waste and increasing the responsibility of manufacturers
for the impacts of their plastic products.
INDIA AND CIRCULAR ECONOMY
ˆ Need: The adoption of circular economy is essential as India is facing huge strain on the supply of resources due to its large
population.
‒ Circular economy can help generate savings of over $624 billion by 2050 across sectors such as food, agriculture,
construction, and mobility in India.
‒ India’s circular economy could touch $45 billion by 2030 which can positively impact the environment in the form of
lowered levels of congestion and pollution.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


118
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Sectors such as fashion, construction, agriculture and food, mobility, and rare earth materials can provide the biggest
opportunities for circular economy startups.
‒ Adopting Circular economy will lower the cost of providing services to individuals as compared to traditional take-make-
waste model.
ˆ Challenges:
‒ Lack of a clear vision towards the end-goal of India’s circular economy mission and gaps in actual implementation of the
policies.
‒ The industry is also reluctant in adopting the circular economy model due to supply chain limitations, lack of incentives
to invest and complex recycling processes.
‒ Lack of information to support participation in reusing/ recycling/re-manufacturing processes.
‒ Lack of legislative mandates for the procurement of recycled/ secondary raw materials.
‒ Lack of fiscal incentives to businesses to complete the supply chain.
‒ Lack of clear mechanisms for trading of extended producer responsibility certificates.
ˆ Initiatives:
‒ Battery Waste Management Rules 2022: The rules cover all types of batteries, including Electric Vehicle batteries, portable
batteries, automotive batteries, and industrial batteries.
ˆ The rules are based on the concept of Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR) where the producers of batteries are
responsible for the collection and recycling/refurbishment of waste batteries and the use of recovered materials from waste
into new batteries.
ˆ To meet the EPR obligations, producers may engage themselves or authorise any other entity for the collection, recycling, or
refurbishment of waste batteries.
‒ Plastic Waste Management Rules in 2022: Aim to strengthen circular economy of plastic packaging waste and development
of recycling infrastructure for plastic packaging waste.
ˆ Rules notify instructions on EPR for plastic packaging and allow for sale and purchase of surplus EPR certificates.
ˆ The reuse of rigid plastic packaging material has been mandated in the guidelines to reduce the use of fresh plastic material
for packaging.
‒ E-Waste Management Rules 2022: Restricted the use of hazardous substances (such as lead, mercury, and cadmium) in
manufacturing electrical and electronic equipment that have an adverse impact on human health and the environment.
ˆ Environmental compensation to be provided by the companies that don’t meet their target.
ˆ Extended EPR Certificates.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


119
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY

DRONE TECHNOLOGY
CONTEXT
The Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR) has successfully conducted a trial run of delivery of blood bags under its iDrone
initiative.
DRONE TECHNOLOGY
ˆ A drone is an unmanned aerial vehicle that receives remote commands from a pilot or relies on software for autonomous
flight.
ˆ Classification of Drones Based on Weight:
‒ Nano drone: less than or equal to 250 grams;
‒ Micro drone: greater than 250 grams and less than or equal to 2 kilograms
‒ Small drone: greater than 2 kilograms and less than or equal to 25 kilograms
‒ Medium drone: greater than 25 kilograms and less than or equal to 150 kilograms.
‒ Large drone: greater than 150 kilograms.
APPLICATIONS OF DRONES
ˆ Agriculture
‒ Crop and soil health monitoring
‒ Irrigation estimation and scheduling
‒ Requirement and efficacy assessment of fertilizer and pesticide spraying
‒ Anti-locust operations
‒ Crop output estimates
‒ River and canal erosion; restoration tracking
‒ Insurance claim surveys
ˆ Healthcare
‒ Delivery of medicines, equipment and other supplies
‒ Pathology tests - sample collection from remote or epidemic/ pandemic affected areas
ˆ Defence
‒ Security Surveillance
‒ Combat
‒ Communication in remote areas
‒ Swarm drone solutions
‒ Counter drone solutions
ˆ Monitoring
‒ Land records and property rights
‒ The drone technology in the SVAMITVA scheme launched by the Government of India helped village residents get their
property cards by mapping out the abadi areas.
ˆ Surveillance: Surveillance, situational analysis, public announcements and evidence gathering for:
‒ Security of sensitive installations
‒ Raids and counter-terror operations
‒ Crowd management
‒ Crime control
‒ VVIP security

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


120
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ Disaster management; search and rescue


‒ Traffic management
ˆ Housing
‒ Urban planning and management
‒ Construction planning and monitoring
‒ Incident reporting
‒ Prevention of encroachment and land-use alteration
ˆ Environment:
‒ Monitoring of forests and wildlife
‒ Afforestation through seed-balls, irrigation and real-time
monitoring
‒ Anti-poaching actions
‒ Pollution assessment and evidence-gathering
GOVERNMENT OF INDIA’S INITIATIVES FOR PROMOTING DRONE TECHNOLOGY
ˆ Liberalised Drones Rules, 2021: These provide the necessary regulatory
framework for commercial use of drones.
‒ Compliances and fees required to operate drones have been reduced.
‒ The need for a security clearance before any registration or issuance
of licence has been dispensed with.
‒ R&D entities have been provided blanket exemption from all kinds of
permissions.
‒ Restrictions on foreign-owned companies registered in India have also
been removed.
‒ The airspace map of India has also been released that shows red,
yellow and green zones across India, allowing civilian drone operators
to check the demarcated no-fly zones or where they need to undergo
certain formalities before flying one.
ˆ Drone Response and Outreach in North East (i-Drone) Initiative: It
facilitates vaccine delivery to tough and hard-to-reach terrains of India.
‒ The i-DRONE was first used during the COVID-19 pandemic by the
ICMR for distributing vaccines to remote areas.
ˆ Drone Shakti initiative: It aims to promote and facilitate drones as a
service through start-ups.
ˆ Production Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme for Drones: It aims to incentivize the manufacturing of drones and drone
components in India with a focus to make the indigenous’ industries globally competitive.
‒ Support under the scheme will be provided only to companies engaged in the manufacturing of drones and drone
components in India.
‒ PLI scheme for drones can generate investment of over Rs 5,000 crore and 10,000 direct jobs in India’s drone manufacturing
sector till FY24.
‒ The PLI scheme is also expected to boost the total turnover of the domestic industry to Rs 900 crore in FY24.
ˆ Drone Import Policy: The Indian Government has banned the import of drones except for R&D, defence and security
purposes.  The move is aimed at giving a boost to domestic manufacturing of drones.
ˆ Make in India: The Government’s ‘Aatmanirbhar Bharat’ (Make-in-India) drive is going all out to support domestic enterprises
by fine-tuning policies and regulations so that more and more products are manufactured within the country.
ˆ Drone Training Schools: These have been set up in various States which have the potential of being a game changer in the
promotion and development of drone applications.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


121
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

CHALLENGES ASSOCIATED WITH DRONES


ˆ Safety of the Public: In a case of an accident, the drone may fall in a residential area and injure the public. Military drones have
crashed and caused huge damages in these areas.
ˆ Cheaper Cost Enables a Larger Population to Procure Drones: Drones are relatively cheaper in comparison to conventional
weapons and yet can achieve far more destructive results which is the primary reason for increased number of drone attacks.
ˆ Delivery of Mass Destruction Weapons: Combat drones are most dangerous as they can be used to deliver weapons of mass
destruction.
‒ India has accused Pakistan at the UN Security Council for supporting the non-state actors in cross-border supply of illicit
weapons using drones.
ˆ Use in Attacks: The potential use of drones in a terrorist incident or attack against a critical infrastructure and soft targets is a
growing concern for law enforcement agencies worldwide.
ˆ Safety of Drone: There is a possibility of losing the package carried by the drones. Hackers can hijack a Drone using GPS
jammers and loot the Drone or its payload. Softwares resistant to hacking have to be developed.
ˆ Swarm Drones: Swarm drones have been a problem for military where scores of drones overwhelm and confuse detection
systems, resulting in some of the drones sneaking through.
POTENTIAL SOLUTIONS
ˆ More Funding: Investments for drone start-ups has marginally grown in India, increasing on average from US$5.1 million per
start-up in 2021 to US$5.6 million in 2022.
‒ To leverage the benefits of drone technology, India needs to invest in its own Unmanned Aerial Vehicle systems.
ˆ Counter Drone System: Though the Defence Research and Development Organisation has developed a detect-and-destroy
technology for drones, but it is not yet into mass production.
‒ The attacks on the Jammu Air base of the Indian Air Force and many such sightings of drones near critical installations call
for a quick deployment of an effective counter drone system.
ˆ Better Coordination: Establishment of an inter-ministerial committee on drones is necessary for fostering better coordination
among various ministries .
ˆ Participation by Private Sector: There needs to be more initiatives by the private sector such as Drone Yatra 2.0 by Garuda
Aerospace that aim at spreading awareness about the opportunities for skilled drone pilots/maintainers.
ˆ Participation by States: States like Gujarat and Himachal Pradesh have promulgated drone policies at the state level to
complement the Drone Rules, more States follow suit for giving a fillip to the adoption of drones.
ˆ Generate Employment: Drones can be significant creators of employment. According to a report by the World Economic
Forum, Indian agriculture can help boost the country’s GDP by 1-1.5% and create at least five lakh jobs in the coming years.
ˆ India as Global Drone Hub: It can be concluded that drones can lead to economic growth due to their reach, versatility, and
ease of use, especially in India’s remote and inaccessible areas.
‒ In view of its traditional strengths in innovation, information technology, frugal engineering and huge domestic demand,
India has the potential to be global drone hub by 2030.

LIGO-INDIA PROJECT
CONTEXT
Laser Interferometer Gravitational-Wave Observatory (LIGO project) has been given final clearance by the Union Government.
WHAT IS LIGO?
ˆ LIGO is an international network of laboratories that aim to detect ripples in spacetime (gravitational waves) produced by
the movement of large celestial objects like stars and planets.
ˆ Spacetime encapsulates the current understanding of how gravitation works. It was first postulated in Albert Einstein’s
General Theory of Relativity.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


122
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ The strongest waves that LIGO was expected to detect were predicted to come from some of the most energetic events in the
cosmos. The first detection in 2015, almost a century after their prediction, came from a merger of two black holes 1.3 billion
light years away. This first discovery was awarded the Nobel Prize in Physics in 2017.
THE LIGO-INDIA PROJECT
ˆ The LIGO-India project will be set up in Hingoli district of
Maharashtra, and will start scientific runs from 2030.
ˆ The detector will be built as part of LIGO-India collaboration.
This project will be collaboration between Ligo-USA, India,
Germany, Australia and U.K.
ˆ Lead institutes: Institute of Plasma Research (IPR), Gandhinagar,
Inter-University Centre for Astronomy and Astrophysics (IUCAA),
Pune, Raja Ramanna Centre for Advanced Technology (RRCAT),
Indore.
ˆ Funding: The project will be funded by Department of Atomic
Energy and Science and Technology, Government of India.
WORKING OF LIGO
ˆ LIGO facility comprises of two 4-km-long vacuum chambers,
built perpendicular to each other. Highly reflective mirrors are
kept at the end of the vacuum chambers.
ˆ Light rays are released simultaneously in both the vacuum
chambers. They hit the mirrors, get reflected, and are captured
back.
ˆ Under normal circumstances, the light rays in both
the chambers would return simultaneously. But when
a gravitational wave arrives, one of the chambers gets
a little elongated, while the other one gets squished
a bit.
ˆ Due to this effect, light rays do not return
simultaneously, and there is a phase difference. The
presence of a phase difference marks the detection of
a gravitational wave.
ˆ Need for Multiple LIGO detectors:
‒ The instruments LIGO facilities are so sensitive
that they can easily get influenced by events like
earthquakes, landslides, or even the movement
of vehicles, to produce a false reading. Multiple
observatories will revalidate the signals.
‒ Since the chances of two observatories, located in
different geographies, producing the exact same
false reading are very low, it will help in improving
the quality and accuracy of information.
SIGNIFICANCE OF LIGO-INDIA PROJECT
ˆ The project has the potential to transform India into a global site of gravitational physics research, aiding training and the
handling of precision technologies and sophisticated control systems.
ˆ The detector at Hingoli will scan the sky for significant gravitational events, involving black holes and neutron stars, and
vibrations from the beginning of the universe. It will further add to the capabilities of the worldwide network.
ˆ Once the LIGO-India detector comes online, it will stimulate more discoveries from existing optical and radio telescopes by
pointing them accurately minutes before the fireworks begin.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


123
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Being separated geographically from the US detectors, the LIGO-India detector will enable discoveries by looking for signals
in blind spots in the existing network.
ˆ It will significantly advance the capacity to detect new astrophysical and cosmological phenomena.
ˆ The project can cement India’s reputation for successfully running an experimental Big Science project in the world.
ˆ LIGO-India will be that rare laboratory on Indian soil that will be doing fundamental science at the global frontier from the
very day it starts operating.
ˆ It will enable the Indian scientists to rapidly master the needed operational expertise and take their place among the world
leaders in this extraordinarily complex area of science.
ˆ During the construction phase, much cutting-edge fabrication will be done in India like Large, ultra-high vacuum equipment,
stable lasers, atomically flat mirrors, quantum sensing, and advanced control systems.
‒ These efforts will improve precision engineering capabilities, expand modern industrial capability in India, and create
high-tech opportunities for new entrepreneurs and established firms.
ˆ LIGO-India will serve as a focal point for young Indians to search for the deepest mysteries of nature as they see the discoveries
issue from this new observatory on Indian soil and come to grips with the ultra-sophisticated technology.
ˆ For Indian undergraduates in physics and allied fields, this is an exceptional opportunity to opt for post-graduate research in
gravitational wave physics.
WHAT ARE GRAVITATIONAL WAVES?
ˆ Gravitational Waves are ripples in spacetime that are produced by moving objects, especially celestial. They can be compared
with ripples in water.
ˆ Because these are ripples in spacetime, gravitational waves have the effect of causing a temporary deformation in a body
when it comes in contact.
ˆ When a gravitational wave passes the Earth, the Earth is squeezed in one direction, and bulges in the perpendicular direction.
ˆ This deforming effect of gravitational waves is extremely tiny, and hence it could not be experimentally verified for 100
years.
ˆ Experimental detection: The first ever gravitational waves were detected in 2015, by the two US-based LIGO detectors,
produced by the merger of two black holes.
EVOLUTION OF THE CONCEPT OF GRAVITATIONAL WAVES

ˆ Newton’s law of gravitation: Newton postulated that the force that makes any object fall to the ground also makes heavenly
bodies go around in their orbits.
‒ This phenomenon was occurred due to the fact that every celestial body exerted an attractive force on every other body
in the universe.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


124
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

‒ According to the mathematical formulation, the strength of this attractive force was directly proportional to the masses
of the two bodies and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them.
‒ Drawbacks: The theory could not find the reason for the existence of the attractive force between any two bodies.
9 According to Newton’s theory, gravitational force seemed to be propagating instantaneously, over any large distance.
This was proven wrong by Einstein’s Special Theory of Relativity.
9 Special Theory of Relativity had proven that nothing could travel faster than the speed of light. Newton’s gravitational
equation failed to factor time.
ˆ Einstein’s General Theory of Relativity: In his General Theory
of Relativity, Einstein proposed that spacetime (space and
time were not independent entities) was not just a passive
backdrop to the events happening in the universe.
‒ Spacetime interacted with matter, was influenced by it
and in turn, also influenced events. It was comparable to a
heavy object placed on it, and curls around it.
‒ The curvature in spacetime was the reason for smaller
bodies in the vicinity feeling the gravitational pull.
‒ Gravitation is nothing but a curvature in spacetime. Since
the spacetime itself is curved around the heavier mass,
other nearby objects find themselves revolving around
the central mass.
‒ Heavier the central mass, steeper and bigger is the curvature in spacetime, and stronger and more extended is the
gravitational field.

NAVIC SATELLITE SYSTEM


CONTEXT
ISRO has successfully launched the first of the second-generation satellites for its navigation constellation, known as NavIC.
MORE ON THE NEWS
ˆ The satellite is the heaviest in the constellation and was launched by a Geosynchronous Satellite Launch Vehicle (GSLV)
rocket.
ˆ The satellite will replace an older, partially defunct satellite in the IRNSS constellation. It will be ISRO’s ninth satellite for the
NavIC constellation but is considered to be the eighth because the intended replacement had failed to deploy in 2018.
ˆ The launch of second-generation satellite assumes significance since the remaining seven satellites in the constellation are
nearing their end life and must be replaced in the coming days.
ˆ Features of the new satellite:
‒ Nomenclature: Named NVS-01, it will be the first of ISRO’s NVS series of second-generation satellite. It is heavier than the
previous satellites in the constellation.
‒ Atomic clock: The satellite will have a Rubidium atomic clock, which has been indigenously developed by Space Application
Centre-Ahmedabad. Only handful of countries possesses this technology.
‒ L1 frequency: Apart from the L5 and S frequency signals sent by existing satellites, the second-generation satellite will use
L1 frequency, which enables use of the regional navigation system in wearable devices and personal trackers.
‒ Extended mission life: The second-generation satellites are expected to have mission life of more than 12 years. The
existing satellites have a mission life of 10 years.

Significance of Atomic clock


ˆ Satellite-based positioning system determines the object location by accurately measuring the time required for a signal to travel to and
back from it using the atomic clocks on board.
ˆ Satellites will no longer able to provide accurate locations in case of failure of atomic clocks.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


125
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

WHAT IS NAVIC NAVIGATION SYSTEM?


ˆ The Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System
(IRNSS), known operationally as NavIC (Navigation
with Indian Constellation), is the navigational system
operated by ISRO.
ˆ The area under its coverage include whole of India
reaching west to include Saudi Arabia, north and
east to include all of China and south to include both
Mozambique and Western Australia.
ˆ Features of NavIC:
‒ Higher accuracy: NavIC open signals have accuracy
of upto 5 metres and restricted signals will be even
more accurate. GPS by comparison is accurate up
to around 20 metres.
‒ Range: NavIC navigational system provides
coverage over the Indian landmass and up to a
radius of 1,500 km around it.
‒ Can work in hard-to-reach areas: In its range area,
NavIC signals will be available in even hard-to-
reach areas.
‒ Geo-stationary orbit: NavIC uses satellites placed
in high geo-stationery orbit, allowing them to move
at a constant speed relative to Earth, so that they
can look over the same region on Earth.
‒ Optimal signal receiving: NavIC signals in India are
received at a 90-degree angle, making it easier for them to reach devices located even in congested areas, dense forests,
or mountains.
ˆ Applications of NavIC:
‒ Civil applications:
9 Positioning through mobile phones: Many Smartphone chipsets have integrated NavIC receivers, which can effectively
replace the existing GPS for positioning services.
9 Logistics sector: NavIC would revolutionize logistics sector in India as it would help with better optimization and route
suggestions. Route optimization will reduce cost and also pollution.
9 Promote startups: There is ample scope for startups to emerge by keeping navigation services at the core of their
business. This will also reduce cost for companies that utilize navigational services of GPS.
9 Fleet tracking: Fleet tracking is very useful during mining and transport operations to reduce cost and optimize
resources.
9 Navigation services: NavIC can provide navigational services to aerial, marine and terrestrial transports due to its
better accuracy.
‒ Military applications:
9 Enemy positions: A domestic navigational system such as NavIC will help India is tracking enemy positions during war.
9 Border security: The borders of the country can be kept under vigilance using an indigenous tracking system. It will
prevent surprise attacks by enemies.
9 Weapon tracking: Navigational systems can also be used to track fired weapons and also current position of our
military assets.
9 Drone technology: Drones can be controlled and tracked using such navigational satellites, improving their military
capabilities tremendously.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


126
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Importance of NavIC:
‒ Reduce dependence on GPS
‒ Provide better control of homeland and international border security
‒ Provide customized service for fishermen, police, military, and air/water transport.
‒ Expand influence over neighbouring areas, which comes under the range of NavIC
WHAT ARE NAVIGATIONAL SYSTEMS?
ˆ Navigational Systems are satellite constellations that broadcast
positioning, navigation and timing data over a region or
completely across the globe.
ˆ Majority of these constellations make use of radio frequencies
in the L-Band to transmit their signals to receiver on the ground.
OTHER NAVIGATION SYSTEMS ACROSS THE WORLD
ˆ Global Positioning System (GPS): GPS is operated by the U.S.
Space Force. Its first satellite was launched in 1978, and its
first series of satellites became fully operational by 1993.GPS
consists of 31 satellites.
ˆ GLONASS: Russian-owned GLONASS is operated by Roscosmos
State Corporation for Space Activities, a department of the
Russian government.
‒ It was launched fully in 1995, with full satellite coverage over
Russia in 2010. The constellation consists of 24 satellites.
ˆ Galileo: Owned by the European Global Navigation Satellite
Systems Agency, Galileo consists of 26 satellites in orbit, with a
plan to reach 30 satellites by 2021.
ˆ BeiDou: Launched first in 2000, BeiDou is owned by China National Space Administration (CNSA). Currently, it has 48 satellites
in the orbit.
ˆ QZSS: Launched first in 2010, the Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS) is operated by the Japan Aerospace Exploration Agency
(JAXA).
‒ It does not provide global coverage but instead maintains Asia-Oceana regional coverage between Japan and Australia.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


127
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ETHICS - CASE STUDY OF THE MONTH


Custodial violence or deaths:
“The menace of custodial violence or custodial torture or custodial deaths is largely attributable to the overall democratic
institutions’ failure from reporting of incidents to justice delivery by Judiciary. In India, in the past there have been instances of
custodial violence by police targeting suspected individuals, innocent people and undertrials. These incidents of custodial violence
are increasing in recent times and there is a large scale pressure from the civic community including social media after the incident
of custodial death of Kalu Padharshi a labourer in Botad police station, Gujrat. Suppose You are posted as District Superintendent
of police of one of the districts where custodial torture cases are very high. You are under the extreme political and seniors’
pressure to act on this menace.
ˆ Write about various stakeholders and their associated interests. In your opinion, what are the ethical dilemmas you face to
prevent such incidents? What is the course of action you will follow in this case?
ˆ Why there is a rise in custodial deaths in India? What values are compromised in such acts?
ˆ How police should be trained to prevent such acts
ˆ In order to prevent such issues in future what are the institutional reforms you will suggest to State machinery?
Discussion:
Custodial Torture or custodial violence:
Custodial torture refers to the act of subjecting a person who is in the custody of the police or other authorities to physical
or mental pain and suffering. It is a severe violation of human rights and dignity, often resulting in severe physical injuries,
psychological trauma, and in some cases, death. It is in the forms of physical torture, psychological torture, sexual torture, denial
of medical care and other forms of abuse like forced confessions, forced labor, deprivation of basic needs etc.
On the other hand, Custodial Deaths refers to the death of a person in jail resulting from violence and torture inflicted by the
police while in their custody.
Custodial Deaths in India
The Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) has reported the following numbers of death in police custody cases in recent years: 146
cases in 2017-2018, 136 cases in 2018-2019, 112 cases in 2019-2020, 100 cases in 2020-2021, and 175 cases in 2021-2022.
During the past five years, Gujarat has reported the highest number of custodial deaths, with 80 cases, followed by Maharashtra
with 76 cases, Uttar Pradesh with 41 cases, Tamil Nadu with 40 cases, and Bihar with 38 cases.
These numbers reflect the concerning issue of custodial deaths in these regions. This clearly shows the gravity of the menace in
India and so the need of preventing such incidents in the future.
a. Write about various stakeholders and their associated interests. In your opinion, what are the ethical dilemmas you face
to prevent such incidents? What is the course of action you will follow in this case?
Stakeholders Interests of the stakeholders involved in the case:

Victims of custodial violence Constitutional safeguards and human rights violation as per article 21 and
article 20 of the constitution.

Victims’ families and their security Violation of human rights and right to livelihood.

Police persons like Constables, SI and CI who involved in the Need to upheld law and order with substantive and procedural laws like
act of custodial deaths, SP of the district who oversees the law protection of human rights, and CrPC and IPC respectively.
and order of a district.

State democratic institutions Upholding the democratic ideals like public trust on criminal justice system,
Equality before law and equal protection of law.

State media Free and fair media to report fair news in objective manner.

Civil society Role in human rights awareness creation, checks and balances against the
State atrocities.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


128
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

Ethical dilemmas faced by SP in this case/situation:


ˆ Obligation of Rule of law vs Rule by law
ˆ Protection of interests of police personnel Vs Protection of the interests of victims,
ˆ Individual self-interests of police vs Democratic institutional interests like Equality before law, Equal protection of laws,
ˆ Erosion of public trust on democratic institutions vs protection of interests of police personnel.
ˆ Fair, neutral and transparent enquiry vs biased inquiry for the personnel benefits.
Course of the action by SP:
ˆ Immediate reaching out to the victim family to console and convey them condolence.
ˆ Immediate preparation and verification of Ground report of custodial death/ violence;
ˆ Suspension of police personnel who involved in this matter of custodial death till they proved not guilty;
ˆ Once it proved, take strict disciplinary action against the police personnel and give compensation to the victim’s family from
Police Welfare Fund;
ˆ Report the whole incident to the higher officials and Reforms needed to prevent such kind of excess acts by State machinery;
ˆ Give necessary training to police personnel with sensitization and modernisation of police personnel and police stations with
CCTC cameras with 24*7 Centralised Surveillance with decentralised checks and balances.
b. Why there is a rise in custodial deaths in India? What values are compromised in such acts?
Factors Contributing to the Increase in Custodial Deaths in India:
ˆ Lesser Conviction: The perception that many policemen escape punishment contributes to the increase in custodial deaths.
Manipulation of records, intimidation of complainants, and political patronage hinder successful convictions.
ˆ Lack of Prompt Action From Senior Officials: Inadequate action by senior officers indirectly endorses brutal torture. When
erring personnel are not swiftly and appropriately punished, it sends a message of impunity to other rogue policemen.
ˆ Poor Service Conditions and Lack of Police Counselling: Highlighted by various judgments and committees, the poor service
conditions of constables lead to increased frustration and stress. This, in turn, may result in some police personnel resorting
to violence.
ˆ “No Action” or “Extreme Action” Approach: The police in India are often accused of either not taking action or resorting to
extreme measures. This lack of a balanced approach contributes to instances of excessive force and abuse.
ˆ Lack of Comprehensive and Accurate Data: The absence of consistent and reliable data on custodial deaths hinders a thorough
understanding of the problem and the implementation of effective preventive measures.
ˆ Lack of Awareness: Despite constitutional declarations and guarantees, many people remain unaware of their rights and the
protections available to them. This lack of awareness increases the risk of custodial deaths
ˆ Lack of ratification of the UN Convention against Torture and Other Cruel, Inhuman or Degrading Treatment or Punishment
(UNCAT), which India signed in 1997 but has not yet ratified. This prevents India from being bound by international obligations
and standards to prevent and combat custodial torture.
Values which are compromised in such acts are:
ˆ Constitutional: Values such as Rule of law, Equality before law, fair trail to the suspected.
ˆ Virtue Ethics: One of its cardinal value – Justice – is compromised here as suspect is denied to prove her/his case.
ˆ Utilitarianism: If the suspect was sole bread earner for her/his family then injustice is done to the whole family.
ˆ Professional ethics: violation of Code of conduct, Procedural laws like CrPC and IPC, and Police Service Rules
ˆ Disproportionate punishment: Killing a person for any criminal act seems unjustifiable.
ˆ Trust of the public, natural justice, duty ethics, violation of Human and Constitutional rights, values ingrained by training and
oath to the service as well.
c. How police should be trained to prevent such acts?
ˆ Improved Training and Counselling: Enhancing training programs for police personnel, including modules on human rights,
non-violent conflict resolution, and stress management. Providing counselling and support services to address the mental
well-being of police personnel.

For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com Page No.


129
CURRENT AFFAIRS MAGAZINE MAY 2023

ˆ Accountability : Fixing accountability of the police officers or security forces through mock activities or capacity development
courses etc. which will not only end the culture of impunity hitherto enjoyed by them but also sensitize them on the relevance
of accountability and transparency mechanisms.
ˆ Create awareness about Supreme Court guidelines on Custodial deaths- DK Basu vs State of West Bengal, 1997, where
Supreme court laid down the guidelines to prevent custodial deaths.
d. In order to prevent such issues in future what are the institutional reforms you will suggest to State machinery?
Addressing the issue of custodial deaths requires a multi-faceted approach such as:
ˆ Promoting Police Accountability through Standard Operating Procedure: Establishing strong mechanisms for holding police
personnel accountable for their actions, ensuring thorough investigations, and prosecuting those responsible for custodial
deaths.
ˆ Police reforms: Prakash Singh v. Union of India (2006) - This judgment highlighted the need for police reforms and laid down
several directives to ensure police accountability, including the establishment of State Security Commissions, Police Complaints
Authorities, and guidelines for police functioning and accountability.
ˆ Modernization of police forces and infrastructure: CCTV installations in each police station and GPS tracking of police vehicles
with centralized control system. Other facilities like better medical facilities to inmates of custody, and improvement of design
and structure of prisons
ˆ Access to Legal Representation: Supreme court in DK Basu vs State of West Bengal, 1997 gave verdict that all individuals in
custody shall have access to legal representation, particularly for marginalized sections of society who may face additional
barriers.
ˆ Raising Awareness through NGOs: Conducting public awareness campaigns to educate people about their rights, confidence
building exercises, the safeguards against custodial abuse, and avenues for seeking redress like NALSA mechanism etc.
ˆ Institutional support to victim’s family - Nilabati Behera v. State of Orissa (1993): In this case, the Supreme Court held that
custodial deaths amount to a violation of Article 21 of the Indian Constitution. The court recognized the right to compensation
for the victim’s family in cases of custodial deaths.
ˆ Effective Data Collection and Reporting: Establishing comprehensive and accurate data collection systems to monitor
custodial deaths, enabling evidence-based policy-making and targeted interventions.
ˆ Judiciary reforms: to Fastrack the process of resolving the pendency of cases and promotion of idea of Bail Law on the lines
of UK Bail law. ‘
ˆ Role of NHRC- Give more teeth to NHRC to probe into the cases beyond 1 year also. NHRC separate investigation wing support
to make it function effectively for human rights;
ˆ Role of Media to promote Free and fair news, to sensitize public on human rights and Criminal justice system, and various
legal aid measures like NALSA.
Conclusion-
Custodial deaths are blackmarks on Indian democracy. So 273rd report of Law commission of India recommended to ratify UN
Convention Against Torture 1997. India needs such anti-torture law to upheld the spirit of democratic ideals of equality before
law and equal protection of laws.

Page No. For More Study Material, Visit: studyiq.com


130

Вам также может понравиться